V128FB Install

$'(0&29,67$6(5,(6
9,67$)%9,67$)%
&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\
3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP
:LWK6FKHGXOLQJ

,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH

K3521V3 6/04 Rev A

ii
Table of Contents
.
Table of Contents
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
List of Figures ..................................................................................................................................... vi

Conventions Used in This Manual .................................................................................................... vii
SECTION 1: General Description ..................................................................................................... 1-1
About the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB ..............................................................................................................1-1
Features ............................................................................................................................................................1-1
SECTION 2: Partitioning ................................................................................................................... 2-1
Theory of Partitioning........................................................................................................................................2-1
Setting-Up a Partitioned System.......................................................................................................................2-1
Common Lobby Logic .......................................................................................................................................2-1
Master Keypad Setup and Operation ...............................................................................................................2-3
SECTION 3: Installing The Control .................................................................................................. 3-1
Mounting the Control Cabinet ...........................................................................................................................3-1
Installing the Cabinet Lock................................................................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines .............................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines.....................................................................................3-2
Installing the Control’s Circuit Board.................................................................................................................3-2
Installing the Keypads.......................................................................................................................................3-3
Installing External Sounders .............................................................................................................................3-4
Auxiliary Relay Connections .............................................................................................................................3-5
Telephone Line Connections ............................................................................................................................3-7
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8 .............................................................................................3-8
Installing RPM Devices ...................................................................................................................................3-11
Wireless Zone Expansion ...............................................................................................................................3-14
Installing Output Devices ................................................................................................................................3-17
Installing a Remote Keyswitch ........................................................................................................................3-18
Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder .............................................................................................................3-19
Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP .....................................................................................................3-19
Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers ..........................................................................................3-21
Installing the 4100APG Pager Interface .........................................................................................................3-21
Access Control Using VistaKey ......................................................................................................................3-23
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System........................................................................3-24
Event Log Connections...................................................................................................................................3-25
Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module ..............................................................................................................3-25
Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module ...............................................................................................3-27
Connecting the Transformer ...........................................................................................................................3-29
Earth Ground Connections .............................................................................................................................3-29
Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load ...............................................................................................3-30
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery..................................................................................................3-32
SECTION 4: Programming................................................................................................................ 4-1
Program Modes ................................................................................................................................................4-1
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode .........................................................................................................4-1
Data Field Programming Mode .........................................................................................................................4-1
#93 Menu Mode Programming .........................................................................................................................4-2
Zone Number Designations ..............................................................................................................................4-4
iii
Table of Contents
Zone Response Type Definitions......................................................................................................................4-5
Zone Input Type Definitions ..............................................................................................................................4-7
Programming the Control for the Pager............................................................................................................4-8
Programming for Access Control ......................................................................................................................4-8
Programming for ECP Long Range Radio......................................................................................................4-10
Programming for the Event Log ......................................................................................................................4-10
SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions ............................................................................................... 5-1
About Data Field Programming ........................................................................................................................5-1
Programming Data Fields .................................................................................................................................5-1
SECTION 6: Scheduling Options ..................................................................................................... 6-1
Time Window Definitions ..................................................................................................................................6-2
Open/Close Schedules Definitions ...................................................................................................................6-3
Scheduling Menu Mode ....................................................................................................................................6-4
Time Windows ..................................................................................................................................................6-5
Daily Open/Close Schedules ............................................................................................................................6-6
Holiday Schedules ............................................................................................................................................6-6
Time-Driven Events ..........................................................................................................................................6-7
Limitation of Access Schedules ......................................................................................................................6-11
Temporary Schedules.....................................................................................................................................6-12
User Scheduling Menu Mode .........................................................................................................................6-13
SECTION 7: Downloading Primer .................................................................................................... 7-1
General Information ..........................................................................................................................................7-1
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel ...............................................................................................................7-2
Direct-Wire Downloading ..................................................................................................................................7-3
Telco Handoff....................................................................................................................................................7-3
SECTION 8: Setting the Real-Time Clock ........................................................................................ 8-1
Setting the Time and Date ................................................................................................................................8-1
SECTION 9: User Access Codes...................................................................................................... 9-1
User Codes & Levels of Authority .....................................................................................................................9-1
Multiple Partition Access...................................................................................................................................9-2
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code .................................................................................................9-3
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code .............................................................................................9-4
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User .............................................................................................................9-4
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ...............................................................................................9-4
Exiting the User Edit Mode ...............................................................................................................................9-4
SECTION 10: Testing the System .................................................................................................. 10-1
Battery Test.....................................................................................................................................................10-1
Dialer Test.......................................................................................................................................................10-1
Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69) ......................................................................................................................10-1
One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68) ....................................................................................................10-1
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST) ...........................................................................................................10-2
Armed Burglary System Test ..........................................................................................................................10-3
Testing Wireless Transmitters ........................................................................................................................10-3
Trouble Conditions..........................................................................................................................................10-4
To the Installer ................................................................................................................................................10-5
iv
Table of Contents
APPENDIX A: Regulatory Agency Statements............................................................................... A-1

UL Installation Requirements........................................................................................................................... A-1
UL864/NFPA Local Fire ................................................................................................................................... A-1
UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire................................................................................... A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault .................................................... A-1
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm.............................................................................................. A-2
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ............................................................................................... A-2
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements. ..................................................................................... A-2
APPENDIX B: Summary of System Commands............................................................................. B-1
APPENDIX C: Specifications........................................................................................................... C-1
APPENDIX D: Contact ID Event Codes........................................................................................... D-1
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES...................................................................................................... D-1
Index ...........................................................................................................................................Index-1
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
v
List of Figures
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock ...............................................................................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations.........................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board.......................................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel ................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply...............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections............................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation.....................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset .............................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18) ..............................................................3-8
Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control.....................................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply........................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8...........................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-14: Polling Loop Connections to the Control Panel ..............................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-15: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module .......................................................................3-13
Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules .......................................................................3-13
Figure 3-17: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection ........................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-18: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed) ..................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-19: 4204 Relay Module...........................................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-20: 4204CF Relay Module......................................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-21: Wiring the FSA Module ...................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-22: Remote Keyswitch Wiring ...............................................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-23: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring .....................................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-24: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals............................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-25: Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer ...........................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-26: Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer ................................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-27: Wiring the VistaKey .........................................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-28: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module ...............................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-29: Printer Connections to the 4100SM................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-30: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections ...............................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-31: UVS Connections to the Control Panel...........................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-32: Connecting the Backup Batteries ....................................................................................................................3-32
Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections...............................................................................................................7-3
VISTA-32FB Summary of Connections Diagram ...................................................................................... Second to Last Page
VISTA-128FB Summary of Connections Diagram ........................................................................................Inside Back Cover
vi
Conventions Used in This Manual
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following
symbols (icons).
These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for
UL a UL Listed application.
These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the
installation, and that, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.
This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or
! could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also
denotes warnings about physical harm to the user.
ZONE PROG? Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to
alpha keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
✴00 Additional system options are programmed via data fields, which are indicated by a “star” (T)
followed by the data field number.
PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:

Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products.
vii
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB Installation and Setup Guide
viii
S E C T I O N 1
General Description
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB is a UL Listed commercial fire and burglary control panel with the following features:
• 8 built-in hardwired zones and expandable using polling loop and wireless zones
• Up to 96 output relays
• Supervision of Notification Appliance Circuits, phone lines, keypads, RF receivers, and output devices
• Scheduling capabilities (allows certain operations to be automated)
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB can interface with the following devices:
• An ECP Long Range Radio that can send Contact ID messages
• An access control system by using either the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the VISTA Gateway Module) or a
VistaKey module (via the polling loop)
The access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB Control Panel in a UL
UL installation.
The system supports either the VistaKey or the VISTA Gateway Module, not both.
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, user codes, partitions, VistaKey modules, the
master partition and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-128FB’s features. The following table lists the
differences between the VISTA-32FB and the VISTA-128FB control panels. All other features are identical
for both panels.
Also, all procedures in this guide for entering zone numbers or user numbers show 3-digit entries, which is
valid for the VISTA-128FB. For the VISTA-32FB these entries are only 2-digits.
Feature VISTA-32FB VISTA-128FB

Partitions 2 8
Number of Zones 32 128
Number of User Codes 75 150
Master Partition Number 3 9
VistaKey Modules 4 8
Features
Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones
• Provides 8 hardwire zones.
• Supports up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone 1 and zone 2 (32 total).
• Triggers the built-in sounders on other hardwired smoke detectors if one smoke detector annunciates an alarm. This
feature requires a 4204 Relay Module and/or the 333PRM.
• Supports up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.
• Supports up to 119 additional expansion zones (24 for the VISTA-32FB) using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop.
• Supports up to 128 wireless zones (32 for the VISTA-32FB) fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones.
The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial Burglary
UL applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications.
1-1
• Provides three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).
Peripherals Devices
• Supports up to 31 addressable devices, (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.).
• Supervises devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay modules) and individual relays (up to 32), as well as system
zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).
• Provides 96 outputs using 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, Fire System Annunciators (FSA-8, FSA-24), and V-Plex
Relay Modules can activate outputs in response to system events (alarm condition), at a specific time of day, at
random times, and manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode.
• Supports additional style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits using a 4204CF.
• Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module, which allows access to the system from either a remote location or
on the premises
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB Control Panel in a UL
UL installation.
• Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system’s 8 partitions.
• Supports the PS24 Power Supply Module, which supplies two 24VFW, 1.7A full-wave rectified, unfiltered outputs.
Arming/Disarming and Bypassing
• Provides global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the user code has access to in one command).
• Supports Exit Error Logic, whereby the system can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused
by leaving an entry/exit door open. If the system is not subsequently disarmed, faulted entry/exit zone(s) and/or
interior zones are bypassed and the system arms.
• Supports Recent Close report, which is designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 2
minutes after the exit delay has expired.
Partitioning
• Can control 8 separate areas (partitions) independently, each functioning as if it had its own separate control. All
fire zones must be assigned to partition 1.
• Provides a Common Lobby partition, which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition is
armed, and to disarm when the first partition is disarmed.
• Provides a Master partition (3 for the VISTA32FB; 9 for the VISTA-128FB), used for the purpose of viewing the
status of all partitions at the same time.
• Can display fire, burglary, panic, and trouble conditions at all other partitions’ keypads (selectable option).
Scheduling
• Can automate system functions, such as arming, disarming, and activation of outputs (e.g., lights).
• Provides access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).
• Provides an End User Output Programming Mode, allowing the user to control outputs.
Access Control
• Supports up to 8 VistaKey modules (8 access points) (4 modules on the VISTA-32FB), which are used for access
control. It is a single-door access control module.
• Support up to 250 access cards.
• Supports ADEMCO PassPoint system via one VISTA Gateway Module (VGM), for a fully integrated access control
system.
• Can store access control events in the event log.
System Communication
• Provides supervision of the phone lines (main and backup)
• Supports the 5140DLM optional backup dialer for the second phone line.
• Supports ADEMCO Contact ID; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Express; and 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 ADEMCO and
Sescoa/Radionics Low-Speed formats.
1-2
Section 1 – General Description
The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID communication. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting all
128 zones, as well as openings and closings for all 150 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with the
ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4.10 or higher to fully support all new VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB report
codes. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact your distributor.
• Can send messages such as alarms, opens/closes, etc. to a paging service (this requires the installation of the
4100APG Pager Interface).
• Supports Dynamic Signaling feature, which prevents redundant signals being sent to the central station when both
the built-in dialer and Long Range Radio are used.
• Provides an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option that permits voice dialog between an operator at the central
station and a person at the premises. An AAV unit, such as ADEMCO UVS, is required.
Downloading
• Supports upload and download capability.
• Can download access control cardholder information.
Event Log
• Provides an event log (history log) that can store up to 512 events.
• Can print the event log on a serial printer.
• Can view the event log on an alpha keypad.
Fire Walk-Test Mode
• Provides an automatic test of integrated V-Plex devices that have the automatic test feature.
• Can display all fire zones that remain untested.
• Can log test results in the event log.
• Can report the test results to the central station.
Additional Features
• Provides two style-Y supervised Notification Appliance Circuits.
• Provides an auxiliary relay (form C) that can activate alarms troubles/supervisories, reset 4-wire smoke detectors, or
as a battery saver (removes power form non-critical loads 4 hours after AC power loss).
• Provides up to 60 installer-defined, custom words that can be used for zone descriptors.
• Provides 35 keypad macro commands (each macro is a series of keypad commands of up to 32 keystrokes) using the
A, B, C, and D keys by partition.
• Provides cross-zone capability, which helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless
its cross-zone is also faulted within a 5-minute period.
• Contains a built-in User’s Manual, which provides the end user with a brief explanation of the function of a key
when the user presses any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds.
• Provides trigger outputs, which may interface with Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as keyswitch
LEDs, or printer.
• Provides Maintenance Signal support for certain smoke detectors (5808, 4192CPM, 4192SDM, 4192SDTM, 5192).
At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160) must be connected to the system for programming (if you are using
keypad programming), and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program
additional user codes into the system at a later time.
1-3
1-4
S E C T I O N 2
Partitioning
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Theory of Partitioning
This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas (2 in the VISTA-32FB), as if each had its own
control. These areas are called partitions. A Partitioned system allows the user to disarm certain areas while leaving
other areas armed, or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each system user can be assigned to
operate any or all partitions, and can be given a different authority level in each.
Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many partitions (1-8) are required.
Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.
Keypads
Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition. It can also be assigned to Partition 9 if
Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup and Operation” later in this section.)
Zones
Each zone must be assigned to one partition. The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's
keypad(s).
All fire zones must be assigned to partition 1 to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly.
Users
Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like
to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for
those partitions (when entering user codes).
A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition from another partition's
keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he/she wants to log on to from
another.
A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this partition by causing
arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby Logic” later in this section).
Setting-Up a Partitioned System

The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more information on how to program
the options, see SECTION 4: Programming.
1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).
2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.
5. Assign users to partitions.
6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user can log on to (alpha keypad
only).
7. Program partition-specific fields (see the SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions).
Common Lobby Logic

When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building, that shared partition may
be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a
medical building where there are two doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows
explanation).
The Common Lobby feature employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two programming
fields determine the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects
Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.
2-1
1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby is automatically disarmed.
b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
b. Arming a partition that is programmed to arm the lobby causes the system to automatically attempt to arm the
lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or if another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby
cannot be armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.
You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the lobby. Do not enable
field 1*19 without enabling field 1*18.
The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate.
1*18 1*19 Disarms when Attempts to arm Can be armed if

Affects Lobby Arms Lobby partition disarms? when partition other partitions
arms? disarmed?
0 0 NO NO YES
1 0 YES NO NO
1 1 YES YES NO
0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---
Example
Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.
User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2
User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.
Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.
Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.
NOTE: In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( )
indicate the current status of the other partition when the user
takes action.
COMMON LOBBY
MAIN ENTRANCE V128BP-001-V0
Sequence #1:
Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action
User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms
User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change
User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change
User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms
2-2
Section 2 – Partitioning
Sequence #2:
Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action
User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms
User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)
User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change
User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change
Notice that in sequence #1, because Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office #2 is programmed to
affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which
affects the lobby, was still disarmed.
When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to arm the lobby. User #1
would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if
the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building.
Do not assign partition 1 as the common lobby if fire zones are being used in the system. All fire zones must be
assigned to partition 1 to ensure all Fire Test modes operate correctly.
How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Codes with Global Arming
If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the SECTION 9: User Access Codes), the keypad prompts the
user to select the partitions they want to arm. Only the partitions the user has access to are displayed. This allows the
user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in
mind, however, that if a user attempts to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user cannot arm the
lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.
Codes with Non-Global Arming
If a user arms with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation is automatic, as described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.
Other Methods of Arming/Disarming
Common Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby in
one of the following manners:
• Quick-Arm
• Keyswitch
• Wireless Button
• Wireless Keypad
Arming/Disarming Remotely
If a user arms or disarms remotely (through Compass downloading software) the lobby does not automatically follow
another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all
affecting partitions first.
Auto-Arming/Disarming
If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby partition does not automatically
follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby partition must be scheduled to
arm/disarm and must be scheduled as the last partition to arm.
If you are using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods, for the lobby
partition, (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This
causes the lobby to arm last.
Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning
keypads as Master keypads for the system.
Assigning any keypad to Partition 9 (Partition 3 in the VISTA-32FB) in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode
makes that keypad a Master keypad. A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its
display at one time. This is useful because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to have to log on to
various partitions from one partition’s keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred.
2-3
The following is a typical display:
SYSTEM 12345678
STATUS RRNNA 7B
Possible status indications include:

A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum C = Comm Fail
I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm T = Trouble
F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery
To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter [✴] + Partition No. (e.g., [✴] + [4]). This allows
viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that
partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user
must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access is denied.
The following is displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when a
user logs on from a keypad on Partition 9:
WHSE DISARMED
HIT 7FOR FAULTS
Pressing [✴] causes the following display to appear at Partition 1’s keypad(s):
FAULT 002 LOADING
DOCK WINDOW
Additional zone faults are displayed one at a time. To display a new partition’s status, press [✴] + Partition No.
The Armed LED on a Master keypad is lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully. The Ready LED is lit only
if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither LED is lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are
ready.
Press [✴] + [0] or [✴] + [9] to return to the master partition. Otherwise, if no keys are pressed for 2 minutes, the system
automatically returns to the master partition
The sounder on a Master keypad reflects the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions. The priority of
the sounds, from most to least critical, is as follows:
1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds
2. Steady burglar alarm sounds
3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)
Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists.
A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1, and will activate
on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.
2-4
S E C T I O N 3
Installing The Control

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This section describes the procedures for mounting and wiring the control panel and all the peripheral devices.
master partition and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-128FB’s features. See SECTION 1: General
Description for the differences between the VISTA-32FB and the VISTA-128FB control panels. All other
features are identical for both panels.
Mounting the Control Cabinet

To mount the control cabinet, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.
2 Using fasteners or anchors (not supplied), mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall in a clean, dry area
that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.
To provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and Figure 3-2
UL Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations to follow. For UL Commercial Burglary installations that require
ATTACK RESISTANCE, use the cabinet included in the VISTA-ULKT kit.
Installing the Cabinet Lock

To install the lock, perform the following steps: PUSH
ON LOCK
CHECK UNTIL IT
Step Action POSITION
SNAP
TAB
IS SEATED
SECURELY
1 Remove the cabinet door, and the lock LOCKED

PUSH
knockout from the door. Insert the key into the
ADEMCO
ADEMCO
lock.
2 Position the lock in the hole, making certain
SNAP
that the latch will make contact with the latch
cab_lock_snap-001-V0
UNLOCKED TAB
bracket when the door is closed.

CABINET DOOR
3 When correctly positioned, push the lock until BOTTOM STEP 1 STEP 2
it is held securely by its snap tabs.
Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock
Use an Ademco No. K4445 Lock (supplied).
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines

• The panel door must be supervised. Mount the • All wiring between the bell and panel must be run
clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet’s in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to be run
right side wall as shown in the diagram below, and in conduit.
wire it to zone 6. • All wiring that is not run in conduit must exit from
• Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the
the ADEMCO AB12. The bell housing’s tamper cabinet.
switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired • All unused knockouts must be plugged using the
to zone 6. disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied), as
• Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it indicated in the diagram below.
for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only • Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox
one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24- using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws
hr. audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one (supplied) after all wiring, programming, and
burglary partition is used. checkout procedures have been completed.
3-1
(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)

RUN BELL WIRES
IN CONDUIT PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING,
REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF
CLIP-ON DOOR DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN.
TAMPER SWITCH
CABINET DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PC PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE
MOUNTING KNOCKOUT
BOARD KNOCKOUT OPENING)
HOLE OPENING
PLUG THIS (4 PLACES)
CARRIAGE BOLT
KNOCKOUT
PLUG THIS HEX NUT AND
KNOCKOUT WASHER CABINET SIDE WALL
(OUTSIDE)
PLUG THIS RUN ALL REMAINING

KNOCKOUT WIRE THROUGH HERE cabattack-001-V0
Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines

• Follow the guidelines given above for Grade A • For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed
Mercantile Premises listing. contact must be used inside the cabinet through
• Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes.
the control’s backbox. Follow the manufacturer’s This sensor also must be wired to zone 6.
instructions for proper sensor mounting. This
sensor also must be wired to zone 6.
Installing the Control’s Circuit Board

To install the circuit board in the cabinet, perform the Notes:
following steps: • Make certain that the mounting screws are tight.
Step Action This ensures that there is a good ground connection
between the PC board and the cabinet.
1 Hang the three mounting clips on the raised
• Dress field wiring away from the microprocessor
cabinet tabs. Refer to Figure 3-3 (Detail B).
(center) section of the PC board. Use the loops on
Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for
shown in the diagram to avoid damage. This anchoring field wiring using tie wraps (Detail C).
will also avoid problems with insertion and These steps are important to minimize the risk of
removal of the PC board. panel RF interference with television reception.
2 Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots
at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that the
DETAIL A
board rests in the slots as indicated (Detail A). SIDE VIEW OF
BOARD INSERTED
3 Swing the base of the board into the mounting INTO SLOTS
clips and secure the board to the cabinet with DETAIL C

SIDE VIEW
the accompanying screws. OF SLOTS
+
DETAIL B
SIDE VIEW OF SHORT
MOUNTING CLIPS
(TYP.)
hi_end_mnt-PCB
Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board
3-2
Section 3 - Installing the Control
Installing the Keypads

• Up to 31 addressable keypads (addresses 00-30)
Addressing the Keypads
may be used (you may need to use an auxiliary
power supply if the 1A aux. output is exceeded). The keypads will not operate until they are
• Use a 2-line alpha display, 6139/6160 (gray or red) physically addressed and enabled in the
(check with local AHJ for approval of keypad color). system’s Device Programming in the #93 Menu
To wire the keypads, perform the following steps: Mode.
Step Action Set each keypad for an individual address (00-30)
1 Determine wire gauge by referring to the according to the keypad’s instructions. Set an alpha
Wire Run Length/Gauge table below. keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher
Wire Run Length/Gauge Table addresses (00 and 01 are enabled in the system’s
Wire Gauge Length default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and
#22 gauge 450 feet
above will appear blank until they are enabled in the
system’s program. Each keypad must be set for a
#20 gauge 700 feet
different address.
#18 gauge 1100 feet
#16 gauge 1750 feet • Do not set any keypads to address 31
(nonaddressable mode). They will interfere
2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect with other keypads (as well as other devices)
individual keypads to separate wire runs. connected to the keypad terminals.
The maximum wire run length from the
• If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is
control to a keypad, which is homerun back
present on a keypad, data from the control is
to the control, must not exceed the lengths
not reaching the keypad. Please check your
listed in the table. wiring.
3 Run field wiring from the control to the
keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads
of the wire gauge determined in step 1).
When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices
4 Connect keypad(s) to terminals 11, 12, 13, exceeds 1A, you can power additional keypads from a
and 14 on the control board, see Figure 3-4. regulated 12VDC power supply (e.g., ADEMCO
NOTE: If using only one keypad, it may be AD12612 (1.2A)). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed
connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2, and supply for UL installations.
must be mounted on, or within three feet of Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 3-5,
the cabinet. The keypad on Port 2 is using the keypad wire colors shown. Be sure to observe
electrically isolated from those on Port 1 and the current ratings for the power supply used.
will continue to function even if wiring
problems prevent the other keypads from • Make connections directly to the screw
working properly. terminals as shown in Figure 3-5. Make no
connection to the keypad blue wire (if
• The length of all wire runs combined, present).
regardless of the wire gauge, must not • Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal
exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad on the power supply unit to terminal 7 (–) on
conductor cable is used (1000 feet if the control.
unshielded cable is run in conduit, which
acts a shield, or if shielded cable is used).
SUPPLEMENTARY CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP
• If more than one keypad is wired to one run, POWER SUPPLY
AUX. AUX. DATA DATA
then the above maximum lengths must be + – IN OUT
divided by the number of keypads on the run + – 11 12 13 14
(e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two
keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).
IMPORTANT:
MAKE CONNECTIONS
RED
11 DIRECTLY TO SCREW
TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE
TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE
TO KEYPAD RED WIRE
TERMINALS AS SHOWN.
TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE
TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE
TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE
BLACK MAKE NO CONNECTION

12
KEYPADS TO THE KEYPAD BLUE
GREEN WIRE (IF PRESENT).
13
YELLOW
pwr_sup-002-V0
kypd_conn-001-V0
14
CONTROL
TERMINALS
Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply
3-3
Installing External Sounders

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB provides two Wiring the Alarm Output
Notification Appliance Circuits for operating fire and
The wiring of the Notification Appliance Circuits
burglary alarm notification appliances. Each circuit is
depends upon whether you are going to supervise the
rated as follows: 10VDC – 14VDC, 1.7A max., power-
circuit or not. Use the appropriate procedure below for
limited. NOTE: The total alarm current drawn from
your application.
Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, polling loop, Bell
1, and Bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3 amps for battery- Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL
independent operation.
UL installations.
The outputs has the following options:
• Selectable for supervision. Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices
• Selectable to activate by individual zone Model Device Type
assignments ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell
• Selectable for confirmation of arming ding. System Sensor PA400B Indoor piezo sounder
(beige/PA400R (red) rated at 90dB @ 10 feet.
• Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter
System Sensor MA-12/24 Horn
zones are faulted.
System Sensor SS1215 ADA Strobe
• Selectable for steady or pulsing
System Sensor SS121575 ADA Strobe
• Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30 System Sensor MASS1215 ADA Horn/Strobe
minutes.
System Sensor MASS121575 ADA Horn/Strobe
System Sensor MA/SS-12 Horn/Strobe
If you purchased a kit containing the PS24 Wheelock LS1-12-VFR Strobe
Power Supply Module, you may use this Wheelock MS1-12-VFR Strobe
module to convert one or both VISTA-
Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe
32FB/VISTA-128FB 12VDC, 1.7A style-Y
supervised Notification Appliance Circuits to Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe
24VFW, 1.7A style-Y supervised Notification Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe
Appliance Circuits. WheelockMT4-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe
Gentex GXS-2-15 Strobe
Gentex GXS-2-1575 Strobe
• Burglary Notification Appliance Circuits
UL must be programmed for a timeout of 16
Gentex SHG-12-15 Horn/Strobe
Gentex SHG-12-1575 Horn/Strobe
minutes or longer.
Faraday 5336L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe
• Commercial fire alarm systems require
Faraday 5337-L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe
Notification Appliance Circuits to be
supervised.
• This control complies with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA)
requirements for temporal pulse sounding
of fire notification appliances.
Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision

When supervision is enabled, the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-
128FB monitors the Notification Appliance Circuits
wiring for open and short circuit faults while the output
is inactive. The system provides a trouble indication
(Zone 970 Bell 1; 971 Bell 2) when an open occurs; or
when a short occurs between the Bell (+) and Bell (-)
terminal wiring, or between the Bell (+) terminal wiring
and earth ground.
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB indicates the trouble
condition regardless of whether the system is armed or
disarmed. The zone displays on the keypads, reports to
the event log, and transmits to the central station (if
programmed) on Partition 1. The trouble is cleared from
the display by entering the user code + OFF.
3-4
BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS 3 4 5 6
BELL 1 IS CONFIGURED AS A BURGLARY BELL CIRCUIT
USE NONPOLARIZED GRADE A INDICATING DEVICES
(e.g., ADEMCO NO AB12 - SEE WIRING NOTES BELOW)
WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED; CUT WHITE JUMPER, W1,
+ +
BELL 1 BELL 2
ON MAIN PCB.
ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 3-8 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,
ZONES 3-8 ARE ASSIGNED TO BURGLARY PARTITION 1)
STEADY ALARM OUTPUT
16-MINUTE TIMEOUT.
BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS

BELL 2 IS CONFIGURED AS A FIRE BELL CIRCUIT
USE POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.
CLASS B OPEN/SHORT SUPERVISION. 2k EOLR
24-HR TROUBLE RESPONSE TO FAULTS.
(MODEL 610-7)
ACTIVATES FOR ZONE 1-2 ALARMS (BY DEFAULT,
ZONES 1-2 ARE ASSIGNED TO FIRE PARTITION 1)
PULSED ALARM OUTPUT.
NO TIMEOUT AB12 WIRING NOTES:
DISCONNECT THE AB12'S FACTORY-WIRED CONNECTION
FROM ITS TERMINAL #4 TO ITS OUTER BOX.
AB12 BELL/BOX WIRING SET FIELD 3* 17 TO "1" TO ENABLE ZONE 6 TAMPER FUNCTION.
TO PANEL'S BELL +
TO ZONE 6 - (TB24)
TO ZONE 6 - (TB23)
(e.g., BELL 1; TB3)
(e.g., BELL 1; TB4)

TO PANEL'S BELL –
GROUND (TB30)
TO PANEL'S EARTH
ASSIGN ZONE 6 TO A BURGLARY PARTITION. PROGRAM
IT FOR DAY TROUBLE/NIGHT ALARM RESPONSE (TYPE 05)
WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY ONLY ONE BURGLARY
PARTITION. PROGRAM IT FOR 24-HR. AUDIBLE ALARM
RESPONSE (TYPE 07) WHEN THIS BELL IS USED BY
MORE THAN ONE BURGLARY PARTITION.
ALL WIRING FROM AB12 TO PANEL MUST BE RUN IN
CONDUIT.
2k EOLR
1 2 3 4 5 6
AB12 OUTER BOX

TAMPER
SWITCHES INNER LINER
belloutput-003-V0
BELL
Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections

Supervising the Notification Appliance Circuits Disabling the Supervision of the Notification
To wire the NAC using the supervision feature, perform Appliance Circuits
the following steps: To install the NAC and disable the supervision feature,
Step Action perform the following steps:
1 Install a 2K EOL resistor (Model 610-7, Step Action
supplied) across the last notification 1 Cut the white jumpers W1 (for Bell 1) and W2
appliance on each Notification Appliance (for Bell 2) on the main PC board.
Circuit to be supervised.
2 Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell
2 Program Zone 970 (Bell 1) and zone 971 (Bell 2) with a response type of 00.
2) with a response type of 19 (24-Hour
Trouble).
The Notification Appliance Circuits will not
respond unless the zones are assigned to them.
For fire alarms, the system displays “FIRE ALARM
SILENCED.” This message also displays if the
Notification Appliance Circuit is not supervised.
Auxiliary Relay Connections

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB provides a built-in
Alarm Activation
Form C relay with contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC, 2.8A.
The relay may be programmed (field 3✳61) for one of (3✳61 = 1 or 4) Steady activation in response to an
the following functions: alarm.
• Alarm Activation If field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay remains active
until Aux. Relay Timeout expires or until User Code +
• Trouble/Supervisory Activation
OFF is entered. This option can be used to provide an
• 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset
unsupervised Notification Appliance Circuit for
• Battery Saver supplementary strobes, sounders, etc. when wired to
the Aux Power 1 or a separate power supply, see Figure
3-7.
3-5
If field 3✳61 = 4, the auxiliary relay remains activated When field 3✳61 = 1, the auxiliary relay can be
until User Code + # + 67 is entered. This option can be programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation
used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire of arming ding (field 3✳57) or Chime Mode (field 3✳59).
alarms. By default, the relay is set to activate on alarm
zones 1-8 with no timeout (field 3✳61 = 1).
ALARM
AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS

ACTIVATES FOR ZONES 1-8 ALARMS 7 8 9 10 11 12
(STEADY ALARM OUTPUT).
NO TIMEOUT.
N.O.
POLE
N.C.
AUX PWR #1
GROUND
NOTES:
USE NON-POLARIZED INDICATING DEVICES.
WIRING IS NOT SUPERVISED.
DO NOT EXCEED RATINGS OF THE SUPPLY USED.
IF AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT IS USED, THE COMBINED +
ALARM CURRENT DRAIN FROM AUX. PWR. 2, CAN DRAW POWER FROM
BELL 1, AND BELL 2 CANNOT EXCEED 2.3A MAX. AUX. PWR. 1 OUTPUT OR
FROM SEPARATE SUPPLY.
belloutput-005-V0
Figure 3-7: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Alarm Activation
Trouble/Supervisory Activation Battery Saver
(3✳61 = 0) Steady activation in response to any zone or (3✳61 = 3) When this option is selected, the auxiliary
system related trouble condition or to any fire relay is normally activated (e.g., N.O. and pole contacts
supervisory condition. The auxiliary relay remains are connected) and de-activates 4 hours after the start
activated until all fault conditions have been corrected of AC Loss. Using this feature, non-critical loads, such
and a User Code + OFF is entered. as supplementary keypads, can be disconnected from
4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset the auxiliary power outputs, allowing a smaller
(3✳61 = 2) Momentary (6-second) activation in response capacity battery to be used. The relay re-activates
to a second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence within a few seconds after the AC power restores.
following a fire alarm condition. This interrupts power
to 4-wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones
1-8 and polling loop zones, allowing the detectors to be
reset. Power to the detectors should be wired to the
auxiliary relay and to Aux. Power 1 output, see Figure
3-8.
AUXILIARY RELAY
N.O. 7
POLE 8
+
N.C. 9
Aux. Pwr 1 10
+
11 BLK – +
• •
Keypad Prt 1 12 - 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS
EOL
POWER
+ + SUPERVISION
RELAY
- - MODULE
A77-716B
CONTROL
PANEL
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
+ 2000
ZONE
4_wiresmk-005-V0
HEAT OHM
TERMINALS DETECTOR EOLR
(15-27)
-
Figure 3-8: Wiring Auxiliary Relay for Smoke Detector Reset
3-6
Telephone Line Connections

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB provides one main Telephone Line Supervision
built-in dialer for communication to the central station If the tip/ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts
and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer, both (13 volts if the blue jumper is cut) or the handset
supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines. current is less than approximately 10mA, the
supervision circuits for the dialer output will indicate a
Do not connect the system to telephone lines fault condition. Faults on the phone lines are displayed
that require ground start service. as zones 97 (main dialer) and 975 (backup dialer).
• To prevent risk of shock, disconnect the
!
For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72) phone lines at the telco jack before servicing
UL applications, use either a Long Range Radio the panel.
(LRR) alone, the main dialer with the LRR, or • If the communicator is connected to a
use the main dialer with the 5140DLM. telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the
PABX has backup power supply that can
For listed fire remote station (UL864/NFPA 72)
support the PABX for 24 hours (central
applications, use the main dialer with the
5140DLM. station usage) or 60 hours (remote station
usage). Many PABXs are not power-backed
Telephone line supervision is required for UL up, and connection to such a PABX results
commercial fire alarm systems when dual line in a communication failure if power is lost.
dialer is used for fire signal transmission.
The telephone line inputs have overvoltage
Main Dialer Connections UL protection in accordance with UL1459, as
To connect the main dialer, refer to the Summary of
specified in UL985/UL1023.
Connections diagram and perform the following steps:
Step Action Reporting Formats
1 Connect the main dialer to the telephone The system is shipped defaulted for Contact
company lines using the RJ31X cable ID format. It is the only format capable of
supplied. uniquely reporting all 128 zones, as well as
openings and closings for all 150 users. This
2 If the dialer output is connected to telephone
requires central stations to be equipped with
lines that have a telephone company MTU
the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software
installed, cut the blue jumper (W6).
level 4.10 or higher. If you need to update
Installing the 5140DLM Backup Dialer your 685 Receiver, contact your distributor.
The system supports ADEMCO Low Speed 3+1; 4+1;
Do not connect the main dialer and the backup 4+2; Sescoa/Radionics 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; ADEMCO 4+2
dialer to the same telephone company line. Express; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Contact ID
formats.
To install the 5140DLM, refer to the Summary of Dialer Operation
Connections diagram and perform the following steps: When only the main dialer is enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,0),
Step Action the system attempts to route all messages over the
main dialer output. When both the main and backup
1 Mount the 5140DLM to the main PC board dialers are enabled (field 3✳30 = 1,1), the system
shield. attempts to route all calls over the main dialer output
2 Connect the backup dialer to the telephone until a fault condition is detected on the main dialer, at
company lines using the RJ31X cable which time it attempts to use the backup dialer.
supplied. The communicator makes up to 8 attempts to transmit
the messages to one or both telephone numbers
3 Connect the backup dialer to the J3 connector
(primary and secondary), depending on the report
on the main PC board using the ribbon cable th
routing options programmed. After the 8 attempt, the
(supplied with the module).
communicator hangs up and the system displays
4 Connect the earth ground screw on the “COMM FAIL” on the keypad. The number of dialer
5140DLM to the earth ground terminal (30) attempts are programmed in field 3✳21 (default = 8;
on the main PC board using 16AWG wire. must be restricted to 3, 4, or 5 if a secondary phone
5 If the dialer output is connected to telephone number is programmed).
lines that have a telephone company MTU The system does not switch to the backup
installed, cut the blue jumper on the dialer unless a fault condition is detected on
5140DLM PC board. the main dialer. The backup dialer will not be
activated because of a programming error.
3-7
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2
zones 1, 2 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other
zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor). 2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones
and must be connected across the loop wires
To wire burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8, connect
of each zone at the last detector.
sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (15
through 27). Connect N.C. and N.O. devices as follows:
• Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+) To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1 and/or zone 2,
side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be perform the following steps:
connected in series with the devices, following the
Step Action
last device.
• Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the 1 Select 2-wire smoke detectors from the list of
loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected compatible detectors.
across the loop wires at the last device. 2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1
(terminals 15 and 16), and/or zone 2
Using 2-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1 and 2
(terminals 17 and 18) as shown in Figure 3-9.
Zone 1 and 2 can support up to 16 2-wire smoke Observe proper polarity when connecting the
detectors each (32 total). detectors.
3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector
The alarm current on zones 1 and 2 supports
only one smoke detector in the alarmed state. in the loop across the zone 1 terminals. The
EOL resistor must be connected across
the loop wires at the last detector.
When assigned zone type 9 or 16, the second entry of a
User Code + off at a keypad interrupts power to these
zones to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm.
15
2000 OHMS
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors
ZONE 1
SMOKE
EOLR
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL # DETECTOR
Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2400 16
2_wiresmk-001-V0
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2400TH
Photoelectric w/B401B base System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor & B401B System Sensor 2451TH Figure 3-9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 (for
Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1400 zone 2 use terminals 17 & 18)
Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base) System Sensor 2451
Using 4-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1-8
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base) System Sensor 2451 You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be
Ionization duct detector (DH400 base) System Sensor 1451DH
powered from the panel’s Auxiliary Power output
without exceeding the output’s rating (1A).
Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1100
Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is
not automatically reset after an alarm, and
Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2100
therefore must be momentarily interrupted
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2100T using either the auxiliary relay or a 4204 Relay
Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151 Module.
These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
with the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB and are
UL the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be
Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated
for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm reset time
used. not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire
smoke detectors are listed below.
Detector Type Detector Model #
Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412
Photoelectric w/heat System Sensor 2412TH
sensor, direct wire
Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1412
3-8
Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8, perform
the following steps:
Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be
UL supervised with an EOL device (use a System Step Action
Sensor A77-716B EOL relay module connected 1 Select 4-wire smoke detectors (see list of
as shown in Figure 3-10). compatible detectors shown previously in
this section).
2 Connect detectors (including heat detectors,
if used) across terminals of the zone
selected. All detectors must be wired in
parallel. See Figure 3-10.
NOTE: If you are using the auxiliary relay
to reset the smoke detectors, refer to
Installing the Auxiliary Relay previously in
this section for wiring instructions.
3 Connect the EOLR at the last detector in the
loop across the zone’s terminals. You must
connect the EOLR across the loop wires
at the last detector.
AUXILIARY RELAY
N.O. 7
POLE 8
+
N.C. 9
Aux. Pwr 1 10
+
11 BLK – +
• •
Keypad Prt 1 12 - 4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS
EOL
POWER
+ + SUPERVISION
RELAY
- - MODULE
A77-716B
CONTROL
PANEL
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
+ 2000
ZONE
4_wiresmk-005-V0
HEAT OHM
TERMINALS DETECTOR EOLR
(15-27)
-
Figure 3-10: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Using Smoke Power Reversal Module The 333PRM reverses polarity to smoke
The 333 PRM Polarity Reversing Module is used to detectors with Integral Temp-3 Sounders.
reverse the polarity of the positive and negative Typically, in alarm, each draws 49-60mA of
voltages powering smoke detectors. The module is for current. The control panel supplies only enough
use with 4-wire smoke detectors that employ a sounder current for one smoke detector. In order to
and voltage-reversing feature. The module is triggered attach more than one, an external power
by a pulsing Notification Appliance Circuit. supply and an external relay may be required.
Smoke Detectors Compatible with the 333PRM Installing the 333 PRM
The 333PRM may be used with the System Sensor Mount the 333 PRM inside the control panel’s cabinet
2112/24AT and similar models with the required or in a separate cabinet using the double-sided tape
operating features previously stated. provided. Wire the 333PRM as shown in Figure 3-11 or
Figure 3-12. Refer to the 333PRM Installation
Instructions for detailed information on the installation
of the module.
3-9
CONTROL PANEL
12 10 9 5 8
8
333 PRM 7
6
5 – +
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS EOL POWER
4 SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
+ +
A77-761B
3 - -
SHOWN POWERED.
-2 RELAY OPENS WHEN
P1 POWER IS LOST
+1 2000
JUMPER OHM
HEAT EOLR
DETECTOR
JUMPER P1 ON
333PRM-004-V0
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN + -
"B" POSITION
FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control

CONTROL PANEL
9 12 8 10 5
8
333 PRM
7
6
5 – +
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS EOL POWER
4 SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
+ +
A77-761B
3 - -
SHOWN POWERED.
-2 RELAY OPENS WHEN
P1 POWER IS LOST
+1 2000
JUMPER OHM
HEAT EOLR
DETECTOR
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN + -
"B" POSITION
FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
SUPPLY
POWER
+
333PRM-005-V0
USE A 12VDC,
BATTERY-BACKED,
UL LISTED POWER
SUPPLY.
Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply
Zone 6 Tamper Configuration Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for

Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA- day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one
32FB/VISTA-128FB Cabinet Door Tamper Switch and burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr.
for the ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Burglary Bell Box audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one
Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner. The bell Housing’s burglary partition is used. Enable the Zone 6 Alternate
tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be Tamper Function (program field 3✳17.
wired to zone 6. When set in this manner, and the zone senses an open
or short, or an earth ground fault occurs by drilling
through the AB12 housing, the system triggers a
trouble when the system is disarmed and an alarm
when it is armed. (See the Installing the External
Sounders for wiring the ADEMCO AB12.)
3-10
Using 2-Wire Latching Glassbreaks on Zone 8 • The alarm current provided by zone 8
supports only one glassbreak detector in
Zone 8 can support 2-wire glassbreak detectors. The
the alarmed state.
zone provides enough standby current to power up to 50
2-wire glassbreak detectors meeting the requirements • Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts
listed below. when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8.
Other contacts may prevent proper
Compatible Glassbreak Detectors glassbreak detector operation.
Use detectors that meet the following ratings:
Standby Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC
To wire 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors to zone 8,
Standby Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent perform the following steps:
resistance of all detectors in parallel)
Step Action
Alarm Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)
Alarm Current: 2mA–10mA 1 Select compatible 2-wire glassbreak
detectors that meet the requirements stated
Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds
previously.
NOTES: 2 Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals
• You can use detectors that exceed 1.1k ohms in 27 and 28). See Figure 3-13.
alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of
3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last
less than 3.8 volts in alarm.
detector in the loop across the zone’s
• The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and terminals. You must connect the EOL
found to be compatible with these ratings. resistor across the loop wires at the last
detector.
GLASSBREAK
DETECTOR ZONE 8
27 (+)
2000
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
OHMS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
EOLR
glass_conn-001-V0
26 (-)
Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8
Installing RPM Devices

The polling loop provides both power and data to the
RPM devices, and is constantly monitoring the status of • For new polling loop installations, always use
all zones enabled on the loop. The maximum current twisted pair wiring. In many cases, existing
non-twisted pair wiring may be used, but it is
draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more
more susceptible to interference from other
than 128mA (unless the system uses a 4297 Polling
sources, and may be problematic in installations
Loop Extender Module).
with long wire runs or in high noise
Devices that can be programmed via either DIP environments.
switches or the built-in unique serial number • Always locate polling loop wiring at least six
must be set for serial number mode operation. inches (15cm) of AC power, telephone, or
intercom wiring. The polling loop carries data
All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel between the control panel and the devices;
to the [+] and [-] polling loop terminals of the control interference on this loop can cause an
panel (28 and 29). You can wire from device to device, interruption of communication. The polling loop
or have multiple branches connected directly to the can also cause outgoing interference on the
control panel in a star configuration. intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot
be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note
UL • The 4208 must be mounted either inside the
that the maximum total wire length supported is
control cabinet or in a separate enclosure that
cut in half when shielded wire is used.)
has a tamper-supervised cover.
• The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and
the left loop must be EOLR-supervised. • No more than 64mA may be drawn on any
• The 4278 right loop cannot be used. individual wire run.
• The 4194 is not UL Listed. • When a star configuration is used, the total
length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed
• The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA-
4000 ft (2000 ft. if you are using unshielded wire
32FB/VISTA-128FB Auxiliary Power Output or
in conduit or shielded wire).
from a UL Listed supplementary power supply.
• The 7500 and 9500 detectors are not UL Listed.
3-11
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the installation exceeds or deviates Step Action
from these parameters, refer to the application note on the
Honeywell website for additional information. To access 3 Mount each device in the desired location.
the application note: Refer to the device’s instructions.
1. Go to the honeywell.com/security website 4 Run wires from the control panel to each
2. Click the Honeywell Security & Custom Electronics link. device on the polling loop (see Figure 3-14).
No individual wire run may exceed the
3. Click the Commercial link. lengths shown in the following table.
4. Click the Documentation link.
Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs
5. Click the V-Plex Application Note.
Wire Gauge Max. Length
Compatible Polling Loop Devices
#22 gauge 650 feet
Model Type #20 gauge 950 feet
Number #18 gauge 1500 feet
4208 8-Zone Expander #16 gauge 2400 feet
4190WH 2-Zone Expander
4278 Quad PIR 5 Wire each device to the polling loop, making
4275 Dual PIR sure of the correct polarity (refer to the
4194 Surface-Mount Reed Contact (Wide Gap) device’s instructions).
4297 Extender Module NOTE: If you are using serial number
devices, and intend to enroll each device
4192SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices
through the keypad automatically, wire no
4192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat more than 25 of these devices to the
Detector control at a time. Then power up and
4192SDT Same as above and provides maintenance program them before connecting the next 25.
M signals Leave previously enrolled devices connected.
5192 Same as above and provides maintenance If you intend to manually enter the serial
signals numbers through the keypad or through
4192CP Ionization Smoke Detector Compass downloading software, all the
4192CPM Same as above and provides maintenance devices may be connected before powering
signals up to program.
4101SN Serial Number Single-Output Relay Module
4208U Universal 8-Zone Expander
4939SN- Serial Number Surface-Mount Reed 25 26 27 28 29
BR Contacts + -
POLLING LOOP
4939SN-
GY
4191SN- Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact
WH
4190
RPM TO RIGHT LOOP
4959SN Aluminum Overhead Door Contact
7500 Single Technology Glassbreak Detector
9500 Dual Technology Glassbreak Detector 4192SD
SMOKE
4209U Universal Group Zoning Module
4193SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander
polling_loop-002-V0
4293SN Serialized 1-Zone Expander 4278

PIR
4190SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

998MX Serialized PIR
Figure 3-14: Polling Loop Connections to the
Control Panel
To install polling loop devices, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select devices from the list of compatible
devices shown previously.
2 Set the DIP switches in the device (if
required). Refer to the device’s instructions
for the DIP Switch Tables.
3-12
Polling Loop Supervision Using the 4297 Polling Loop Extender
A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide
zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only. If additional polling loop current, to extend the polling
annunciation is desired, program the zone as type 05 or loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual
type 19. electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to Figures 3-15
If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot and 3-16, to follow.
"see" that device), the system displays a trouble
condition for all zones on that device. If the panel is DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender
armed when a device fails, and the zone is a burglary module with the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB.
zone, the will go into alarm
A trouble on zone 997 prevents a partition from Be sure to include the total current drawn on
being armed, unless all polling loop zones on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary
that partition are bypassed. load on the panel’s power supply.
INPUT POLLING LOOP EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

TO
CONTROL PANEL RPM RPM 4297 RPM RPM OTHER
RPMS
INPUT LOOP LIMITS: EXTENSION POLLING LOOP LIMITS = SAME AS INPUT LOOP
• 128 mA MAX. LIMIT CURRENT TO 64mA ON ANY
INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN.
• NO MORE THAN 64 DEVICES MAY BE USED.
• NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN CAN EXCEED: COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:
• NO MORE THAN119 DEVICES COMBINED.
GAUGE LENGTH • TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH
polling_loop_003-V0
#22 650 FT LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT.
#20 950 FT (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED ). WIRE IN
#18 1500 FT CONDUIT, OR IF USING SHIELDED WIRE
#16 2400 FT
• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT

EXCEED 4000FT. (2000FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE
Figure 3-15: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module
• DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN

SERIES (i.e., DO NOT CONNECT ONE EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #1
MODULE’S EXTENSION LOOP TO
ANOTHER MODULE’S INPUT LOOP.)
4297 RPM
CONTROL PANEL INPUT POLLING LOOP
EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2
4297 RPM
COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

polling_loop_two_4297
• NO MORE THAN 128 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION
LOOP #1. NO MORE THAN 128 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND
EXTENSION LOOP #2.
• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1
COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN
CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE). TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT
LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #2 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF
USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE).
Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules
NOTE: The input loop limits stated in Figure 3-15 apply to Figure 3-16 as well.
3-13
Wireless Zone Expansion

• Use two identical receivers to provide either a
UL The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup greater area of coverage or redundant protection.
Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial They must be set for different addresses.
Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and • Any zone from 1 to 128 can be used as a 5800
transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64
Burglary applications. (reserved for a wireless keypad).
RF System Installation Advisories
In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882 Series • Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area.
receivers. Information about the 5881 Receivers Do not place it on or near metal objects. This will
applies as well to the 5882 Receivers. Both decrease the range and/or block transmissions.
receivers use the same transmitters.
• Install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the
control panel or any keypads, to avoid interference
The following table lists the receivers that may be used from the microprocessors in these units.
and the number of zones they support.
• If dual receivers are used:
5800 Series Receivers
a. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other,
Receiver Zones as well as from the control panel and remote
5881L up to 8 keypads.
5881M up to 16 b. Each receiver must be set to a different device
5881H up to 128 address. The receiver set to the lower address
st
is considered the 1 RF receiver for supervisory
5881ENHC up to 128 (use with UL864 installations
purposes.
c. The House IDs must be the same.
RF System Operation and Supervision d. Using two receivers does not increase the
The 5800 RF system operation has the following number of transmitters the system can support
characteristics: (127 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless
• The receiver responds to a frequency of 345MHz. keypad).
• The receiver has a nominal range of 200 feet.
• Supervised transmitters send a supervisory signal
every 70-90 minutes.
• Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF
reception of receivers 2 and 1, respectively. The
reception is supervised for the following two
conditions:
1. The receiver goes “deaf” (doesn’t hear from any
transmitter) within a programmed interval of time
(defined by program field 1*30).
2. Proper RF reception is impeded (i.e., jamming or
other RF interference). The control checks for this
SCREW
condition every 45 seconds.
A response type (05 Day/Night) must be

UL st
programmed for zones 990 (1 receiver) and
nd
988 (2 receiver) for UL installations.
5881ENHC-001-V0
• The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back Figure 3-17: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper
tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary Protection
installations.
• You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic
housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports
a tamper condition.
• The control checks the receiver connections about
every 45 seconds. The receiver supervisory zone is 8
+ 2-digit receiver device address (for example,
Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805).
NOTE: This zone must be programmed with a
response type (e.g., type 05 Day/Night Trouble)
before it supervises the connection to the receiver.
3-14
Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers Step Action
Take note of the address you select for the RF 4 Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the
receiver, as this address must be enabled in keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug
the system’s Device Programming in the #93 the connector at the other end of the harness
Menu Mode. into the receiver.
5 Refer to the Installation Instructions
To install the RF receiver, perform the following steps:
provided with the receiver for installations
Step Action regarding antenna mounting, etc.
1 Mount the receiver, following the advisories

stated previously.
2 Set the DIP switches in the receiver for the
address (01-07). See Figure 3-18.
Make sure the address setting is not
being used by another device (keypad,
relay module, etc.).
3 If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-
head screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab
as shown in Figure 3-17. When the receiver is
pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break
off and remain on the wall. This will activate
a tamper switch in the receiver and cause
generation of a tamper signal. Note that this
signal will also be generated when the
receiver’s front cover is removed.
ANTENNAS
TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD
CONNECTION POINTS. EACH RECEIVER
MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN.
INSERT IN USE MAX. of 220 ft. [67m of #22 (0.64mm)

CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND WIRE or 550 ft. (168m) of #18 (1mm) WIRE
BOARD TERMINALS FOR EACH RUN. OBSERVE 20 ft. MAX.
MOUNTING FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.
HOLES (SEE RECEIVER'S INSTRUCTIONS.)
YELLOW DIP SWITCH WHITE AREAS = SWITCH

RED HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE
BLACK RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT
GREEN CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW
SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."
WIRING
SWITCH RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS
OPENING
POSITION (" - " MEANS OFF)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)
4 ON ON ON ON
DIP SWITCH INTERFERENCE PLUG & SOCKET 3 ON ON ON ON

INDICATOR LED
2 ON ON ON ON
1 FOR FUTURE USE
DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)
ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL

FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS)*.
OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE

INSTALLATIONS.
* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS
THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED
IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS). 5881-001-V0
Figure 3-18: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)
Installing the 5800TM Module This address for the 5800TM must be enabled
Installation of this module is necessary only if you are in the control’s Device Programming in the #93
using a 5827BD or 5804BD Bi-directional device. Menu Mode as a keypad and then assigned to
a partition.
3-15
To install the 5800TM, perform the following steps: Transmitter Supervision
Step Action Supervised RF transmitters send a check-in signal to
the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one
1 Mount the unit using its accompanying check-in is not received from each supervised
mounting bracket near the RF receiver. transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31),
The 5800TM must not be installed within the “missing” transmitter number(s) and “CHECK” or
the control cabinet. It must be between “TRBL” are displayed. Unsupervised RF transmitters
one and two feet from the receiver’s (5802MN, 5804) may be carried off the premises.
antennas. Some transmitters have built-in tamper protection, and
2 Set the module for the appropriate address. annunciate a “CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers
For Address Setting 28 cut the red jumper; are removed.
for Address 29 cut the white jumper; for If a loss of supervision occurs on a transmitter
Address 30 cut both jumpers. programmed for Fire, it reports in Contact ID as
Make sure the address setting is not a Fire Trouble (373), not Loss of Supervision
being used by another device (keypad, (381), to the central station.
relay module, etc.).
Transmitter Input Types
3 Connect the module’s wire harness to the
keypad terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug All transmitters have one or more unique factory-
the connector at the other end of the harness assigned input (loop) codes. Transmitters can be
into the module. programmed as one of the following types:
Type Description
House ID Sniffer Mode RF Sends periodic check-in signals, fault,
(Supervised restore, and low-battery signals. The
This mode applies only if you are using a wireless
RF) transmitter must remain within the receiver’s
keypad (5827/5827BD). Use the House ID Sniffer mode
range.
to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in
UR Sends all the signals that the RF type does,
use in a nearby system. The House ID must be
(Unsupervised but the control does not supervise the
programmed for the receiver in Device Programming in RF) check-in signals. The transmitter may be
the #93 Menu Mode. carried off-premises.
To enter House ID Sniffer mode, enter your Installer BR These send only fault signals. They do not
Code + [#] + [2]. (Unsupervised send low-battery signals until they are
The receiver now “sniffs” out any House IDs in the area Button RF) activated. The transmitter may be carried
and displays them. Keep the receiver in this mode for off-premises.
about 2 hours. Use a House ID that is not displayed.
Exit the Sniffer mode by entering your Installer Code Transmitter Battery Life
+ OFF. Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4
to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and
As Sniffer mode effectively disables RF point the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as
reception, Sniffer mode cannot be entered humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large
while any partition is armed. swings in temperature may all reduce the actual
battery life in a given installation.
5800 Series Transmitter Setup
The wireless system can identify a true low battery
• Transmitters have built-in serial numbers that situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system
must be enrolled in the system using the #93 Menu time to arrange a change of battery and maintain
Mode Programming, or via the downloader. protection for that point within the system.
• Transmitters do not have DIP switches (except Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803)
5827, described separately). contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries. At the
• Some transmitters can support more than one end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced
“zone” (loops or inputs) (e.g., 5816, 5817). Each loop (and a new serial number enrolled at the control).
must be assigned a different zone number.
Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP and
• For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such 5803) should be periodically tested, as these
as the 5804 and 5804BD, you must assign a unique transmitters do not send supervisory check-in signals.
zone number to each individual button used on the
transmitter. To test the transmitters using the Transmitter
The 5808 smoke detector can be programmed ID Sniffer mode and the Go/NoGo Test Mode,
as a “Smart Contact” in Zone Progamming. see the SECTION 10: Testing the System for
This enables the detector to monitor the procedures.
maintenance signals and may prevent false
alarms from a “dirty” detector.
3-16
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
Model Product Input Type Model Product Input Type
5801 Panic Transmitter UR or RF 5816 Door/Window Transmitter RF
5802 Pendant (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) BR Only 5816MN Miniature Door/Window Transmitter
5802CP Belt Clip (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) 5816TEMP Temperature Sensor Transmitter
5802MN Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) UR or RF 5817 Multi-Point Universal Transmitter RF
5802MN2 Miniature (Personal Emerg. Xmitter) UR or RF 5818 Recessed Transmitter RF
5804 Wireless Key Transmitter BR Only 5827 Wireless Keypad House ID
5804BD Wireless Key Bi-directional BR Only 5827BD Wireless Bi-directional Keypad House ID
Transmitter
5849 Glassbreak Detector RF
5804BDV Wireless Key Bi-directional BR Only
5850 Glassbreak Detector RF
Transmitter with Voice
5890 PIR Detector RF
5806/5807/ Photoelectric Smoke Detectors. RF
5808 5808 is UL Listed for Fire 5890PI PIR Detector with Pet Immunity RF
Installing Output Devices

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB supports up to 96 To install the relay modules, see Figures 3-19 and 3-20
outputs. Each device must be programmed as to how to and perform the following steps:
act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to
Step Action
deactivate (STOP). The 4204, 4204CF, FSA-8, FSA-24,
and/or 4140SN may be used as output devices. 1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a
device address 01-15.
If you are using Zone Type 17 (Waterflow) or
18 (Fire Supervisory) to trigger an output, you Do not use an address being used by another
must program an Event for the START (alarm, device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
trouble, etc.). All other Zone Type/System 2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF modules per the
Operations do not require an Event. instructions provided with them.
3 Connect the module’s wire harness to the
Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules
control (11, 12, 13 and 14). Plug the connector
Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C on the harness to the module.
(normally open and normally closed) contacts. Each
When mounting remotely, homerun each
4204CF module adds two style Y supervised
module to the control. The table below shows
Notification Appliance Circuits to the system. For
the maximum wire run lengths. Refer to the
4204CF modules, only relays 1 and 3 on each module
instructions provided with the 4204CF for its
can be programmed.
maximum permissible wire lengths.
The relay module will not operate until the Wire Gauge Maximum Length
device address you have set the DIP switches #22 125 feet
for is enabled in the control’s Device #20 200 feet
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
#18 300 feet
#16 500 feet
SWITCH 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS
➞
OFF ➞ ON POSITION ("—" means "OFF")
➞
ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
➞ SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS

2 ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ➞
➞ ON
2
OFF POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

➞
➞
ON
3 ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —
3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2
➞ ➞
4 ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — — 2 ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —
4
➞ ➞ 3 ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —
3
5 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —
5
➞ 4 ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —
4
➞
5 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —
5
4204 RELAY C
10 11 12
- ALARM POLARITY
➞ 4 NC – SHOWN
9 10 11 12
➞
DIP SWITCH TYPICAL DIP SWITCH NOTIFICATION - EACH OUTPUT
NO FOR SETTING DEVICE NC APPLIANCE B PROVIDES
FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS (SHOWN "OFF") ADDRESS AND STYLE Y
NC 2K EOLR
AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER C #610-7 SUPERVISION
9
RELAY ENABLING/DISABLING +
TAMPER - EACH OUTPUT
3 NC
8
NC POLARIZED RATED 1.2A MAX

8
COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH NOTIFICATION - USE
7
NO
➞
NC
➞
APPLIANCE NOTIFICATION
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG C 4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG – APPLIANCES
6
RELAY NOTIFICATION COMPATIBLE

➞
➞
2 WITH
5
NC APPLIANCE A
5
2K EOLR NOTIFICATION
EITHER OR BOTH
4
#610-7 APPLIANCE
NO CAN BE USED ➞
4
EITHER OR BOTH +
POWER SUPPLY
CAN BE USED ➞
3
C VOLTAGE
➞
3
RELAY TB1 NC +
2
RATING
➞
TB1
1 } POWER FOR
2
NC 13 14 15 16 NC
1
– NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B
1
13 14 15 16 NO YEL ▲ 8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A

DATA IN TB2
FROM CONTROL DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT
▲ BLK
YEL DATA IN TB2 (–) GROUND NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND
FROM CONTROL CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE
GRN DATA OUT
BLK TO CONTROL
POWER LIMITED
(–) GROUND
RED (+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE
GRN DATA OUT CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION
TO CONTROL APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT
RED DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER
(+) 12V ACTIVE OUTPUT)
Figure 3-19: 4204 Relay Module Figure 3-20: 4204CF Relay Module
3-17
Installing the FSA Modules
The 8-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-8 and Optional
Dip Switch
Keyswitch
24-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-24 enable a Connection
fire response unit to identify quickly the point/zone of a
00000
fire. These indicators may be used for other functions as
Terminal
well, such as status indication. Block
To install the FSA module, refer to Figure 3-21 and
perform the following steps: SIDE
VIEW Connect to
Step Action Keypad
All Switches shown Terminals
1 Set the FSA’s DIP switches for a device in Up position.
ECP Bus
(ECP Address 23)
address from 08 to 23. See the module’s
instructions for the DIP switch table. Figure 3-21: Wiring the FSA Module
Do not use an address being used by another The FSA module will not operate until the device
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.). address you have set the DIP switches for is
2 Mount the FSA module horizontally to a enabled in the control’s Device Programming in
duplex box (quad box for FSA-24). the #93 Menu Mode.
3 Connect the module to the control’s keypad
terminals (11, 12, 13 and 14).
Installing 4101SN Relay Modules

The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a • Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with
serial number polling loop output device. The 4101SN tamper-protected cover.
features the following:
• You may use up to 20 polling loop outputs
in the system.
The position of the relay is supervised, but not
• If you are using ZONE # for the START of a
the actual external contact wiring.
polling loop output, and want the output to
stop when the same zone restores, the
• Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC STOP programming must be blank.
with contact supervision.
Connect the device to the polling loop, terminals 28 (+)
• One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary
and 29 (-). Be sure to observe polarity
input zone.
• Operating power and communication with control
panels via the V-Plex polling loop.
Installing a Remote Keyswitch

A UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO • The keyswitch can be used to silence fire alarms
4146, can be used for remote arming/disarming of the without disarming the burglary portion (program a
burglary part of the system and for silencing alarms. “9” in field ✳15). A momentary short silences alarm
The keyswitch operates in only one particular partition. outputs only if a fire alarm is present.
The keyswitch is wired across zone 7. This zone is no
longer available as a protection zone. Be sure to UL In UL commercial fire installations, mount the
program Zone 7 with a response type (e.g., type 10). keyswitch next to the keypad. The keypad
displays the UL-required “FIRE BELL
Operation SILENCED” when the keyswitch is used to
• A momentary short arms the partition in the silence a fire alarm.
AWAY mode, and a short held for more than 10 LED Indications
seconds arms the partition in STAY mode. A
Green Red Indication
subsequent short disarms the partition.
On Off Disarmed & Ready
• The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition’s status
(see table that follows). Off Off Disarmed & Not Ready
Off On Steady Armed Away
• A momentary short silences Notification Appliance
Circuits and keypad sounds, and disarms the Off Slow Flash Armed Stay
system if it was armed. A subsequent short clears Off Rapid Flash Alarm Memory
the alarm memory indication and resets 2-wire
smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).
The keyswitch reports as user 0, if Open/Close
reporting is enabled in field ✳40.
3-18
Keyswitch Tamper Operation (ARMED) (READY)
RED GREEN
The tamper switch need not be used for fire or UL
Household Burglary installations. For UL Commercial
Burglary installations, the tamper switch must be
820 820
wired to zone 6, see Figure 3-22). TO OUT 1 (J2 PIN 7)
OHMS OHMS
TO GND (J2 PIN 8)
Program zone 6 for Day Trouble/Night Alarm (response TO OUT 5 (J2 PIN 6)
TO ZONE 8 + (TERM 27)
type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from the wall, 2000
OHMS TAMPER
the tamper switch opens, causing an alarm or trouble TO ZONE 7/ZONE 8 - (TERM 26) SWITCH
(N.C.)
on the zone. This also causes the control to disable
LOCK
keyswitch operation until the tamper is restored and SWITCH (N.O.)
the associated partition is disarmed. TO ZONE 7 + (TERM 25)
Wiring for the Remote Keyswitch

2000
4146_keyswitch-001-V0
To install the ADEMCO 4146 keyswitch, perform the OHMS
EOLR
following steps: 4146 KEYSWITCH
Step Action
Figure 3-22: Remote Keyswitch Wiring
1 Connect the ADEMCO 4146 to the panel as
shown in Figure 3-22.
2 If you are using the tamper, make sure it is
connected to a zone.
Installing a Remote Keypad Sounder

J2 CONNECTOR
An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad’s
built-in sounder. The remote sounder will duplicate all
(YELLOW)
(BROWN)
(VIOLET)
(GREEN)
(WHITE)
sounds (such as alarms, trouble beeps, etc.) except for
(GRAY)
BLACK
(RED)
BLUE
the short beeps associated with keypad key depression.
1
N
U
One application of this feature would be to produce
T
4
1
O
PU
T
T
R
U
IN
G
O
O
chime beeps at a distant location from the keypads. 4142TR CABLE
If used, program field 3✳20 must be set to “0” and field BLACK
✳15 must be set to the desired partition number. _
The remote sounder must be connected to the Output 5 AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER
J2_trigcon-006-V0
(10MA)
on the J2 connector as shown in Figure 3-23.
RED
+
Figure 3-23: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring
Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP

The control can support an ECP Long Range Radio Operation
(LRR) (7820, 7835C, and 7845C are supported) that
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB features Dynamic
connects to control panel’s keypad terminals. All
Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority
messages programmed for transmission via the phone
lines may also be sent via the LRR. These messages message reporting when Long Range Radio is used.
These message outputs are accessed through data fields
are transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the
format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47. ✱56 and ✱57, respectively. The Dynamic Signaling
feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant
We recommend that, if possible, you use reports sent to the central station.
Contact ID for the main dialer. If Contact ID is The feature is described as follows:
not used, certain types of reports are not sent. Dynamic Signaling Delay (Field ✱56)
Select the time the panel should wait for
Supervision acknowledgment from the first reporting destination
The data lines between the control and the LRR, as well before it attempts to send a message to the second
as certain functions in the radio, can be supervised. destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225
If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs, seconds, in 15-second increments.
both the LRR and the control’s dialer can be Dynamic Signaling Priority (Field ✱57)
programmed to send a Trouble message to the central Select the initial reporting destination for messages,
station. Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1).
NOTE: For complete information, see the Installation
Instructions that accompany the radio.
3-19
The chart below provides an explanation of how the There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the
Dynamic Signaling feature functions. LRR: primary and secondary. These correspond to the
If Priority And message is… Then… two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for
(✱57) is… each partition. If a subscriber ID for a partition is not
programmed (disabling reports to that central station),
Primary Acknowledged Message is removed the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID
Phone No. before delay from queue and no in the LRR will not be transmitted.
("0") expires message is sent to If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers
LRR. (dual reporting), then reporting through the LRR will
Not acknowledged Message is sent to be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in
before delay both the Primary the queue is transmitted to both the primary and the
expires Phone No. and LRR. secondary radio central stations before transmitting the
second event.
Long Acknowledged Message is removed
Range before delay from queue and no If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-
Radio ("1") expires message is sent to 32FB/VISTA-128FB, then the LRR will send the
Primary Phone No. appropriate reports to the primary and secondary
central stations.
Not acknowledged Message is sent to
before delay both the Primary Installing the ECP Long Range Radio
expires Phone No. and LRR. To install the LRR, perform the following steps:
Step Action
Additional LRR reporting options are defined by 1 Mount the radio according to the
selecting the events for each subscriber ID in fields 58 instructions that accompany the radio.
and 59. The reporting events are Alarms, Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test. 2 Connect the data in/out terminals and
Also, within an enabled category, the specific event voltage input terminals of the radio to the
must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance, control’s keypad connection points,
zone 10 is enabled to report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10 terminals 11, 12, 13 and 14. See Figure 3-24.
will report via the LRR, but Zone 11 will not.
Messages arec transmitted from the VISTA- RED
11
32FB/VISTA-128FB to the LRR on a “first in/first out”
basis. If events occur at the same time, they are 12
BLACK LONG
transmitted in order of priority. The priority from most GREEN
RANGE
to least important is : Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms, 13 RADIO
Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles, YELLOW
14
Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all
LRR-001-V0
other types of reports. CONTROL
TERMINALS
Figure 3-24: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad
Terminals
Trouble Messages NOTES:

The following messages are displayed on the 6139/6160 Items 2 and 3 require factory service.
when a problem exists on the Long Range Radio: Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low
1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio battery.
is low. If the item 6 message appears, check the antenna,
2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault connection and cable; if they are secure, factory service
and cannot transmit any messages. is required.
3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without All these messages are displayed in conjunction with
a valid transmission. the “CHECK 8xx” message, which indicates a trouble
4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in
attained. the control.
5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained All of these events except Antenna Fault are sent to the
throughout the transmission. event log and reported to the central station using
6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble).
been detected. Antenna Fault uses Event Code 357. If the tamper is
tripped on the LRR, it uses Event Code 341 (expansion
7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt
device tamper).
(the internal CRC is bad).
3-20
Long Range Radio Connected to the J2 Triggers

These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm The fire and burglary/audible panic alarm triggers are
signaling equipment such as ADEMCO’s 7720, normally LOW and go HIGH until a User Code + OFF
7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios. is entered in all enabled partition(s) that display these
The triggers are common to all partitions and must be conditions.
enabled for each partition (field 2✳20). The silent panic/duress trigger latches HIGH, except for
duress, which is momentary.
If using the Alpha Pager Module, you cannot
Refer to the installation instructions that accompany
use a Long Range Radio connected to the J2
your radio for the connections to the control panel.
triggers.
Installing the 4100APG Pager Interface

Whenever an event occurs on the VISTA-32FB/VISTA- Mounting the 4100APG
128FB, a message can be sent to a pager. This is The 4100APG may be mounted in the control cabinet if
accomplished by using the 4100APG Pager Interface. space is available or, if this is not possible, on the side
The 4100APG will dial and send the information to a of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the pager
paging service. It will transmit to the pager any interface’s cover prior to wiring.
message programmed to be sent to the event log To mount the 4100APG, perform the following steps:
printer, even if the printer is not being used.
The types of messages are divided into 6 categories: Step Action
Alarms; Troubles; Bypasses; Opens/Closes; System and 1 When the 4100APG is mounted inside the
Test. The VISTA-128FB can be programmed so each control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet's
type of message transmits to a different pager. Each interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape.
type has its own programming field for the pager phone You may leave the interface's cover off if it is
number and pager ID. Of course, these could be sent to mounted within the cabinet.
the same pager by programming those fields with the
2 When the 4100APG is to be mounted outside
same pager phone number and ID.
the cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear
The 4100APG will hang up between each message. to mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced
Multiple messages will be sent in the order received. If adhesive tape may be used, if preferred).
the 4100APG cannot make contact with the paging You can bring wires out from the side or
service, it will retry up to 10 times. If the interface back (a round breakout is also available on
loses contact with the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB, it the back). .
will send a message to the paging service to notify the
user.
Do not mount the 4100APG on the cabinet
The pager interface must be wired to a different door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
phone line than the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB
itself. Otherwise, the communication of both
will not function properly. Wiring the 4100APG Without the Event Log Printer
The 4100APG connects to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-
128FB via the 4100SM. The 4100SM wires to the J2
4100APG LED Indications
connector on the control via the 4142TR Cable. See
Below is a table outlining the LED indications: Figure 3-25.
To mount the 4100APG, perform the following steps:
LED Steady Blinking Off Pulse
Power OK On Battery No
Step Action
(B/U) Power 1 Connect the 4142TR to J2 on the control.
Line Not in use (OK) In Use
Call Call in Progress Page Retry Idle 2 Connect the Red and Violet wires of 4142TR
Busy Telephone Busy No Dial Tone OK to TB1-6 (RxD) and TB1-1 (DTR) of 4100SM,
Page Page Fail OK Page OK respectively.
Data No Data Msg Data 3 Connect TB1-7 and TB1-8 of 4100SM to
Load No Data Prog Data terminal 12 (Aux. Power -) and terminal 11
TRBL Trouble OK (Aux. Power +) of the control, respectively.
4 Connect the incoming telephone line to the
4100APG RJ11 connector labeled LINE.
(Optional) Connect the handset side of
telephone line to 4100APG RJ11 connector
labeled PHONE
3-21
Step Action
5 Connect the DB25M to DB-9M Cable
(supplied), from 4100SM (25 pin) to
4100APG (9 pin) connector labeled SERIAL
PORT INPUT
6 When you complete the module’s mounting
and wiring, you should install the module’s
cover (with label affixed, as indicated next).
J2
Red Violet
11 12
4100SM
Aux. Pwr Red 8
Aux. Gnd Black 7
RxD 6
5
4
3
2
DTR
1
DB-25
4100APG
DB-9
Serial Port Input
RJ-11
Line
To Telco
Figure 3-25: Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer

Wiring the 4100APG With the Event Log Printer
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB will support the The serial printer must be configured for 1200
4100APG and serial printer. Follow the steps outlined baud rate, seven data bits, even parity, and
in Wiring the 4100APG Without the Event Log Printer one stop bit. (7/E/1).
and then also connect the serial printer to the DB25
connector as shown in Figure 3-26.
J2
Red Violet
11 12
4100SM
Aux. Pwr Red 8
Aux. Gnd Black 7
RxD 6
5
4
3
2
DTR
1
1200 Baud Serial
DB-25 Printer 7-E-1
DB-25
4100APG
DB-9
Serial Port Input
RJ-11
Line
To Telco
Figure 3-26: Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer
3-22
Access Control Using VistaKey

The VistaKey is a single-door access control module. Mounting and Wiring the VistaKey
When connected to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB, it
provides access control to the protected premises. The
For detailed instructions on how to install and
alarm system supports up to 8 VistaKey modules (8
program the VistaKey, refer the Installation and
access points) (4 modules supported on VISTA-32FB).
Setup Guide that accompanies the VistaKey-SK.
DO NOT USE BOTH the VistaKey and a To mount and wire the VistaKey module, perform the
! PassPoint Access Control System on the same

alarm panel.
following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the VistaKey, door strike or mag lock,
and card reader.
The VistaKey module contains three zones.
UL These zones should ONLY be used for access
2 Mount the door status monitor (DSM) and/or
request-to-exit (RTE) devices.
control functions in UL installations. THESE
INPUT ZONES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR 3 Using Figure 3-27 as a reference, connect the
FIRE AND BURGLARY APPLICATIONS IN UL card reader interface cable to TB3, making the
INSTALLATIONS. +5V or +12V connection last.
VistaKey Features 4 Connect the leads to TB1 in the following
• Each VistaKey communicates with the VISTA- order:
32FB/VISTA-128FB via the V-Plex polling loop. a. All ground leads to terminals 2, 5, and 9.
• If local power to the VistaKey is lost, the module b. The DSM, (optional) RTE, and General
provides backup monitoring of the access point door Purpose leads to terminals 6, 7, and 8,
via a built-in V-Plex device that is powered solely respectively.
from the polling loop. The V-Plex device is c. Door strike (or mag lock) lead to terminal
programmed in the control’s Zone Programming. A 10.
serial number label is affixed to the VistaKey d. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to terminal
module for manual entry of its serial number. 1.
• The VistaKey supports up to 500 cardholders. e. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to the N/C
• All configurable options for each VistaKey are relay terminal 11 (if a mag lock is being
accomplished via software, firmware, and used), OR to the N/O relay terminal 10 (if a
nonvolatile memory, except the access point zone door strike is being used).
number (1-8), which is set via a user-friendly, 16- 5 Connect the (–) polling loop and (+) polling
position rotary switch. loop leads (from the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-
• The addition and removal of VistaKey modules 128FB) to terminals 4 and 3, respectively.
from the system is easily accomplished via the
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB keypad. 6 Set the Address Select switch to the desired
access door number (1-8).
• Each VistaKey provides one open-collector output
trigger (sink 12mA @ 12VDC). 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each VistaKey
being installed.
Connecting the Card Reader

Lead from Reader Lead Color To VistaKey TB3
Terminal #
Green LED Orange 1
Ground* Black 2
DATA 1 (Clock) White 3
DATA 0 (Data) Green 4
+5VDC† Red† 6
+12VDC† Red† 7
* TB-3 Terminal 5 is also a ground and may be used instead of
terminal 2. Terminals 2 and 5 are a common ground.
† Connect to +5VDC OR +12VDC per reader manufacturer’s
specification.
3-23
14V MAX (12V @ 85-160mA Nominal)

GND
TO TB1, 11 OR 12
POLLING LOOP + TO ALARM SYSTEM
POLLING LOOP - CONTROL PANEL
GND POLLING LOOP TERMINALS.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 CLASS A
LIMITS OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT ZONE A (DSM)
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: ZONE B (RTE)
(1) IT MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE. ZONE C (General)
(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT
GND
MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
POLE Door Strike/Mag Coil
N/C MAG COIL POWER + 12 VDC TO ONLY
N/O DOOR STRIKE POWER ONE OF THESE INPUTS.
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN (FROM TB1-1)
ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARDS 70 &
74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:
BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA. 02269).
3A @ 28VDC MAX. (RESISTIVE LOAD)
PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER TB 1 K1
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING AND DOOR
REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH READER INTERFACE CABLE
CONTROL
THIS EQUIPMENT. RELAY
RDR LED (ORANGE)

1
GND (BLACK)
2
FOR ADDITIONAL RATINGS AND DATA 1 (WHITE)
3
SPECIFICATIONS, REFER TO DATA 0 (GREEN)
TB 3 4
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION GND
5 NO
FOR THE VISTAKEY-SK. +5V
6 CONNECTION
+12V (RED)
7
8 TRIGGER (SEE NOTE 3)
+
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED NOTE 1: USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS.
TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION NOTE 2: VISTAKEY TB3 TERMINAL 5 IS A GROUND AND MAY BE
USED INSTEAD OF TB3 TERMINAL 2. TB3 TERMINALS 2 AND 5 ARE
OF THIS SYSTEM. A COMMON GROUND.
VISTAKEY
NOTE 3: WHEN USING TRIGGER TO TURN ON AN LED OR BUZZER,
RETURN HIGH SIDE OF LED OR BUZZER TO TB3 TERMINAL 7.
TRIGGER RATING IS 15mA AT 12VDC.
Figure 3-27: Wiring the VistaKey
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System

The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB interfaces with the
PassPoint ACS via the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM).
The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad PROM C } ECHELON NETWORK
(PASSPOINT ACS)
terminals) of the control and the network bus of the

4-PIN
PassPoint ACS. KEYPAD
PLUG
The control sends the VGM its status information,
event log entries, and entry/exit requests (inputs
programmed with response type Access Point) from
keypads, hardwired zones, and RF transmitters. The TRANSFORMER
VGM then reformats and retransmits this information
to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the PassPoint ACS GREEN
network bus.
UL Interfacing the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB with

the PassPoint Access Control System via the
BLACK
RED
YELLOW
} TO
CONTROL’S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS
VISTA Gateway Module is not permissible for Figure 3-28: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module
UL installations.
Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module

The VISTA Gateway Module is connected between the
ECP bus (VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB keypad
terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access
Control System. See Figure 3-28 for the proper wiring
connections.
3-24
Event Log Connections

This system has the ability to record up to 512 events of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J2 CONNECTOR
various categories in the Event Log (history log). Each
YELLOW
BROWN
GREEN
VIOLET
event is recorded with the time and date of its
BLACK
WHITE
GREY
BLUE
RED
occurrence (if real-time clock is set).
The categories are Alarm, Supervisory/Check, Bypass,
Open/Close, System and Test conditions. The log may 4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
be viewed on an alpha keypad or printed on a serial To TB11 Aux. Power (+)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE
8 + PWR
printer. (25mA current draw)
To TB12 Aux. Power (-) 7 - (GND)
6 RXD
• When using a printer, field 3*19 must be set 5 not used
to a 1. 4
3
not used
TXD
• The serial printer must be configured with 7 2 not used

1 DTR
data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit, and either
RED BLUE WHITE
300 or 1200 baud.
USE GENDER CHANGER 3M
SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM Cable
IF PRINTER HAS DB25 Supplied with
4100SM
Connecting the Serial Printer 4100SM JUMPERS
MALE CONNECTOR
(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)

To connect a serial printer, refer to Figure 3-29 and
4100SM-012-V0
COLOR FUNCTION PIN # SERIAL PRINTER
perform the following steps: RED CD 8
SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS
EVEN PARITY
BLUE CTS 5 STOP BIT
WHITE DSR 6 300/1200 BAUD
Step Action
1 Connect the 4142TR cable to J2 on the Figure 3-29: Printer Connections to the 4100SM
control. NOTE: See the 4100SM Installation Instructions for
2 Connect the Violet and Red wires of the details concerning the serial printer operation.
4142TR to terminal 1 and 6 on the 4100SM,
respectively.
3 Connect terminals 8 and 7 of the 4100SM to
terminals 11 and 12 (aux. power (+) and (-)),
respectively of the control.
4 Connect the serial printer to the 4100SM.
NOTE: The 4100SM Module is supplied with
a 10-foot RS232 cable. A longer cable can be
used if the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB is
separated from the serial printer by more
than 10 feet, but the total cable length should
be less than 50 feet.
Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module

The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that The 4285/4286 VIP Module features:
permits the user to access the security system (and • Allows the user to receive synthesized voice
relays) via a TouchTone telephone. This may be done messages over the phone regarding the status of
either from the premises or by calling the premises the security system.
from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be • Allows the user to arm and disarm the security
used in a security system. This module must be
system and perform most other commands using
enabled as Device Address 4 in the Device the telephone keypad.
Programming in #93 Menu Mode, and must be assigned
to a partition. • Allows the user to control relays using the
telephone keypad.
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permitted in • Provides voice annunciation over the phone to
UL UL installations. confirm any command that is entered.
• Announces many of the same words that would
normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under
Detailed operating instructions for phone access the same system conditions. Refer to the words in
to the security system are provided with the VIP bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in the #93
Module. Menu Mode Programming in the Programming
Guide.
• Can be supervised for connection to control panel
(annunciated and reported as Zone 804).
3-25
The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and
the premises’ handset(s) (see Figure 3-30). It listens for Step Action
TouchTones on the phone line and reports them to the 4 Connect the module to the phone line as
control panel. During on-premises phone access, it shown below. See Figure 3-30.
powers the premises phones; during off-premises phone 4285/4286 Terminal Connects to:
access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and
1. Phone In (Tip) green wire of direct-
any answering machines. connect cord
2. Phone In (Ring) red wire of direct-
• The VIP module will not operate until the connect cord
device address (04) is enabled in the control’s 3. Phone Out (Tip) brown wire of direct-
Device Programming in #93 Menu Mode. connect cord
• Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet 4. Phone Out (Ring) gray wire of direct-
door or attempt to attach it to the PC board. connect cord
5. No Connection
To install the VIP module, perform the following steps: 6. Audio Out 1∗ Speaker
Step Action 7. Audio Out 1∗ Speaker
1 Mount the module in the control cabinet if Supported by the 4286 only
space is available or, if this is not possible, on
the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable
If you mount the VIP Module inside the supplied with the control to make connections
control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet’s to the VIP module. Make connections exactly
interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape. as shown in Figure 3-30. This is essential,
You may leave the module’s cover off if it is even if the system is not connected to a
mounted within the cabinet. central station. The 4285/4286 will not
function if this is not done.
If you mount the module outside the
cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear to
mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced • If touch-tones are not present following phone
adhesive tape may be used, if preferred). access to the security system via an on-
2 Affix the 4285/4286 connections label premises phone, try reversing the pair of
(supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the
Module’s cover, if the cover is used. 4285/4286.
Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the • If the phone plug is disconnected from the
control cabinet’s door. control, the premise’s phones will not operate.
3 Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and data-
out connections from the VIP Module to the
control, using the connector cable supplied
with the VIP Module. These are the same
connections as for remote keypads.
3-26
SPEAKER NOTE: IF CONNECTING SINGLE SPEAKER, USE 8-ohm
SPEAKER ONLY. INCOMING TELCO LINE
IF CONNECTING 2 SPEAKERS, USE 4-ohm OR
GREEN
8-ohm SPEAKERS AND CONNECT IN SERIES.
RED
MAIN
DIALER JACK RJ31X CALLER
JACK JACK ID UNIT
BROWN
GRAY
CONTROL PANEL
8-CONDUCTOR
DOUBLE PLUG CORD
(SUPPLIED)
SEE SPEAKER NOTE

4286 VIP MODULE
GREEN
5 6 7
RED
NOTE:
4286 DEVICE
ADDRESS IS SPEAKER GRAY
1 2 3 4
VOLUME BROWN
SET TO "4".
RED
RJ31X
CONTROL
GREEN JACK
NO CONNECTION KEYED PREMISES

DIRECT
GRAY
BROWN
HEADER CONNECT ANSWERING
CORD MACHINE AND
PHONES
TO CONTROL PANEL
YELLOW GREEN KEYPAD CONNECTIONS ANSWERING
MACHINE
4500 YELLOW
THERMOSTAT
NO CONNECTION
RED
BLACK
GREEN
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:

EXISTING WIRES CONNECTED TO THE "HANDSET"
TERMINALS ON CONTROL MUST BE MOVED FROM
4286_wiring-003-V0
THERE TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ON THE 4286.
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC3USA-74659-KX-N
U.S. PATENT NO. 4791658 RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B
Figure 3-30: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections
Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module

NOTES:
Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) is not permitted
UL in UL installations.
• When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm
verification session is completed, all keypad sounds
are restored. Sirens are restored if the alarm
• 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or timeout period has not expired.
higher. Earlier versions will not hold the • As part of its fail-safe software, the control limits
phone line connection. all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes.
• Contact ID code for “Listen-in to Follow” is This is because once the session begins, the AAV
606. Contact ID is the only reporting format Module controls the duration.
that will send a “Listen-in to Follow.”
• If a new Fire alarm should occur during a session,
The UVS consists of a UVCM and at least one UVST. the control breaks the phone connection and sends
The UVCM board has a DC power jack and a 34- the new Fire Alarm report, then re-triggers the
position terminal block for making connections to a DC AAV Mode. All other dialer messages triggered
power source, UVSTs, telephone lines, music source, or during ongoing conversation are held until either
to the 4286 VIP Module; and to a control panel’s voice the AAV Module signals that it is inactive, or the
trigger and bell outputs (if required). Refer Figure 3-32 15-minute timeout occurs.
for wiring connections. For a detailed explanation of
the wiring connections and the functions of the DC If the phone plug is disconnected from the
power jack and terminal block positions, refer to the control, the premise’s phones will not operate.
installation instructions that accompany the UVS.
3-27
UVCM AND UVST SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

Refer to UVS Installation and Setup Guide K4214 for complete information
SW SWITCH BANK 1 SW SWITCH BANK 2 NOTE 1: CONNECT TO PROPER EARTH GROUND.

1 FUTURE USE, SET TO ON NOTE 2: POWER MAY ALSO BE SUPPLIED BY A LISTED CLASS 2
1 UVST 1 AUX AUDIO, ON = ENABLED
2 FUTURE USE, SET TO ON POWER SUPPLY RATED 12VDC, MIN 600mA CONNECTED TO THE
3 TELEPHONE RING, ON = ENABLED UVCM +12VDC IN AND GND TERMINALS.
4 UVST 4 AUX AUDIO, ON = ENABLED 4 END USER VOICE, ON = DISABLED NOTE 3: SOME CONTROL PANELS USE BUILT-IN TRIGGER AND SOME
5 UVST 5 AUX AUDIO, ON = ENABLED 5 FUTURE USE, SET TO ON USE 4204 RELAY MODULE. REFER TO AAV SECTION OF CONTROL PANEL
6 UVST 6, ON = OUTSIDE, OFF = INSIDE 6 CS CODE LEARN, ON = DISABLED INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE FOR CONNECTION.
7 UVST 7, ON = OUTSIDE, OFF = INSIDE 7 USER CODE LEARN, ON = DISABLED NOTE 4: EITHER MUSIC SOURCE OR 4286 VIP MODULE CAN BE USED BUT
8 VOICE TRIGGER, ON = IMMED, OFF = CALLBACK 8 FUTURE USE, SET TO ON NOT AT THE SAME TIME.
NOTE 5: DO NOT CONNECT IF 4286 VIP MODULE IS USED.
SHIPPED WITH ALL SWITCHES IN "ON" POSITION.
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH BANK 1 SWITCH BANK 2
AUXILIARY AUD ENABLE

FALLING VOICE TRIG
OUTSIDE UVST PWR

VOICE RELAY POLE
RISING VOICE TRIG
INSIDE UVST PWR
INSIDE UVST PWR
AUXILIARY AUD IN
VOICE RELAY NC
ALTERNATE
+12 VDC IN FOR ALARM TRIG IN
PLUG-IN WALL PACK
EARTH GND
NOT USED
NOT USED
+12VDC IN
(SEE NOTE 2)
SPKR 1
SPKR 2
SPKR 3
SPKR 4
SPKR 5
SPKR 6
SPKR 7
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC 3
MIC 4
MIC 5
MIC 6
MIC 7
RING
GND
GND
GND
GND
TIP
AUXILIARY
AUDIO LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 TRIM POT
NOTE 1
MUSIC SOURCE
OPTIONAL
AUDIO OUT
(OPTIONAL; NOTE 5)
(NOTE 4)
GND
APPROPRIATE
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
SELECT
INPUT
RJ31X TIP INCOMING

PLUG
CONTROL PANEL JACK RING
TELCO
LINES
BELL OUTPUT
AUX PWR (12VDC)
2-WAY VOICE TRIGGER

(SEE NOTE 3)
GND
RING
TIP
GREEN
DIRECT
CONNECT
RED
CORD
INCOMING RING
INCOMING TIP
UVST PWR
HANDSET RING
SPKR
HANDSET TIP
GND
MIC
BROWN
GRAY
SPEAKER
VOLUME CONTROL DIAL SPEAKER VOLUME
VOLUME CONTROL
TRIM POT
4286 VIP
UVST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MODULE
OPTIONAL
(NOTE 4)
1234
1 2
3 4
P3
P7
KEYED
HEADER ANSWERING
P2 MACHINE
TYPICAL 1 OF 7 P1
FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION, SEE

4286 VIP MODULE INSTRUCTIONS.
COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68

PREMISES
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC3 USA-40133-SP-T
ANSWERING
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B
UVCM_UVST-SOC-V1
MACHINE AND
PHONE (S)
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF FCC RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL WARNING: TO PREVENT RISK
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DISCONNECT TELCO JACK
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
BEFORE SERVICING THIS PANEL.
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Figure 3-31: UVS Connections to the Control Panel
3-28
Connecting the Transformer

Use the transformer with enclosure supplied with the Step Action
control (SA5110TFR with VISTA-32FB; 1451 with
VISTA-128FB). Both transformers have a manually 4 Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to
resettable circuit breaker mounted inside a protective the transformer’s white and black primary
metal enclosure. The transformer provides leads.
18VAC/72VA secondary winding. 5 Connect the earth ground post on the back of
Use the 1451-24 Transformer when using both the the enclosure to a good earth ground.
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB and the PS24 Power 6 Run 16AWG wire in conduit from the
Supply. This transformer provides 18VAC/72VA enclosure to the control panel.
secondary winding to power the control and
30VAC/188VA secondary winding to power the PS24 7 Use wire nuts to splice the transformer blue
Power Supply. 18VAC secondary leads to the 16AWG wire.
Connect the 16AWG wire at the control
Use the following instructions for mounting and wiring
panel to terminals 1 and 2.
the 18VAC secondary winding of either transformer.
Use the instructions provided with the PS24 Power 8 Replace the front cover of the enclosure and
Supply Module to wire the 30VAC winding of the 1451- fasten it with the screws supplied
24 Transformer.
To connect the transformer to the control, perform the • Use wires having insulation rated for at least
following steps: 90°C operation and suitable for non-power
limited applications.
Step Action • Use care to keep 18VAC wiring separated
1 Remove the front cover of the enclosure. from all other wiring inside the control panel’s
enclosure. This must be done by running,
2 Mount the enclosure to the wall near the non-power-limited 18VAC wiring into the
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB control panel. control panel’s enclosure via one of the
The enclosure has 4 mounting holes on its knockouts on the left-hand side, and then tie-
back surface for this purpose. wrapping these wires to the tie-wrap loops
3 Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in located near the knockout.
conduit. A dedicated circuit must be
used.
Earth Ground Connections

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in To connect the earth ground to the 1451, perform the
this product to be effective, the designated earth ground following steps:
terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good
Step Action
earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground
connection is #16 AWG, run no farther than 30 feet. 1 Connect the earth ground post inside the
1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use
grounding methods specified in the National
The panel requires the earth ground connection
Electric Code).
for its lightning transient protection devices.
2 Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire
To connect the earth ground to the transformer supplied to the ground post. The ground wire should
with the VISTA-32FB, perform the following steps: be the only wire under this nut.
3 Run a 16AWG wire from the ground post to
Step Action
the panel’s earth ground terminal (30). Use a
1 Run an earth ground wire into the built-in second green nut (supplied) to secure this
transformer’s enclosure via the same wire to the ground post.
knockout used for the 120VAC wiring. This connection avoids ground loops that may
2 Use a wire nut (not-supplied) to splice this occur when the 1451 and panel are connected
earth ground wire to the green flying lead to different earth ground systems.
located inside of and bonded to the
transformer’s enclosure. Push the mated
wires into the enclosure.
3 Connect the green flying lead, which emerges
from the top of the transformer’s enclosure to
the earth ground terminal (terminal 30) on
the VISTA-32FB.
3-29
Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load

In the event of an AC power loss the VISTA- Use the worksheets that follow to calculate the total
32FB/VISTA-128FB and the PS24 Power Supply current for Auxiliary Power 1, Auxiliary Power 2, Bell
Module must be supported by backup, rechargeable 1, Bell 2, Polling Loop and the total current load of the
batteries. When the system is used without the PS24, control panel. In each worksheet, multiply each device’s
a 12VDC, 12AH to 34.4AH battery must be connected standby and/or alarm current by the number of units
the control panel. When the system is used with a used.
PS24, two 12VDC, 7AH to 17.2AH batteries must be Then, if you are using the PS24, fill out the Total
connected to the PS24. PS24 Module Load Worksheet, found in the PS24’s
The PS24 configures these batteries to provide 24V instructions, to determine the required capacity of the
backup power to its outputs and 12V backup power to backup batteries that must be connected to the PS24.
the control panel. Select two batteries from the Battery Selection Table in
The battery’s capacity must be sized to provide 24 hours the PS24’s instructions that have a capacity greater
(UL central station fire) or 60 hours (UL remote station than or equal to the calculated capacity.
fire) of standby time followed by 5 minutes (fire only) or If you are NOT using the PS24, fill out the Battery
15 minutes (fire and burglary) alarm time. Capacity Calculation Worksheet, following the other
worksheets below, to determine the required capacity
for the backup battery. Select a battery from the
Battery Selection Table (found later in this section) that
have a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated
capacity.
1. In Worksheet 1, enter devices used on the polling 2. In Worksheet 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary
loop. Calculate total current draw on the polling Power 1. Calculate standby and alarm currents,
loop. then add to get Auxiliary Power 1 current subtotal.
Worksheet 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet 2: Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load
Polling Loop Device Current # of Units Total
Total Current
Device Device Current X Standby Alarm

Model # # of Units
Auxiliary Power 1 Subtotal

(terminals 10 & 11)
1A max. 1.7A max.
Polling Loop Subtotal
(terminals 28 & 29 – 128mA) ✳
✳The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds

128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used. This
module is powered from the panel’s auxiliary power, and
provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an
additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of points
connected to the panel cannot exceed 119.
3-30
3. In Worksheet 3, enter devices used on Auxiliary 5. In Worksheet 5, enter devices connected to the Bell
Power 2. Calculate standby and alarm currents, 2 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get
then add to get Auxiliary Power 2 current subtotal. the Bell 2 Output current subtotal.
Worksheet 3: Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load Worksheet 5: Bell 2 Output Current Load
Total Current Total Current
Device Device Current X Standby Alarm Device Device Current X Standby Alarm
Model # # of Units Model # # of Units
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Bell 2 Output Subtotal

Auxiliary Power 2 Subtotal (terminals 5 & 6 – 1.7A max.)
(pin 5 on keypad port 2)
400mA max. 1.7A max.
6. In Worksheet 6, enter the total calculated subtotals
4. In Worksheet 4, enter devices connected to the Bell
of all listed outputs from Worksheets 1 through 5,
1 Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get
then add to get the combined current.
the Bell 1 Output current subtotal.
Worksheet 4: Bell 1 Output Current Load Worksheet 6: Total VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB Current
Load
Total Current
Total Current
Device Device Current X Standby Alarm Standby Alarm
Model # # of Units
Polling Loop Subtotal
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB PCB
Current (Incl. 2-wire smoke detector 300mA 470mA
XXXXXX
loading on zones 1 & 2)
XXXXXX 5mA 15mA
5140DLM Backup Dialer Module
(inactive) (active)
(terminals 3 & 4 – 1.7A max.) Total Current Load
(1A max. standby; 2.3A max. alarm)
NOTE: The 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active.

However, since the control panel PCB current includes the
main dialer current, and since the main dialer is inactive when
the 5140DLM is active, the 5140DLM imposes only a 15mA
added load on the current supply.
3-31
• If you are not using the PS24, the total control standby load must be limited to 1.27A for 24-hour standby
time, or to 510mA for 60-hour standby time using a 12V, 34.4AH battery connected to the control.
• If you are using the PS24, skip the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet that follows and fill out the
worksheets found the PS24”s instructions instead. The total control panel standby load must be limited to
919mA for 24-hour standby time or 345mA for 60-hour standby time using two 12V, 17.2AH batteries
connected the PS24.
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery

For burglary installations requiring 4-hour standby
8. Use the Battery Selection Table to select the
time followed by 15-minutes alarm time, use a 12AH
appropriate battery for the installation.
battery to support all loads up to and including the
maximum system load (e.g., 1.3A standby/2.8A alarm Battery Selection Table
total control panel load). For fire installations requiring
Capacity Recommended Battery Comment
24-hour or 60-hour standby time, use the worksheet
below to calculate the required battery capacity. 4AH Yuasa NP4-12
7AH Yuasa NP7-12
DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid 12AH Yuasa NP12-12 Fits in large
! type). These batteries require a different mercantile
charging voltage than is supplied by the panel. cabinet only.
14AH Yuasa NP7-12 Connect two
Use Worksheet 7 to determine the required backup in parallel.
battery capacity and use The Battery Selection Table to 17.2AH Yuasa NPG18-12 Fits in large
determine the battery model number. A dual battery mercantile
harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be cabinet only.
wired in parallel for increased capacity.
7. Using the total calculated from Worksheet 6, 9. Connect the battery, referring to Figure 3-32.
calculate the battery capacity required for the
installation. The standby battery is automatically tested for
Worksheet 7: Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet 10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours
after exiting Programming mode. In addition,
Calculated entry into the Test mode initiates a battery test.
Capacity Formula
Value The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB also runs a 5-
Standby Total standby current X 24 or 60 second battery test every 60 seconds to check
Capacity hours X 1.1 contingency factor. if the battery is connected.
Alarm Total alarm curr. X 0.083 (5 min)

Capacity or X 0.250 (15 min)
Total Add standby and alarm

Capacity capacities
NOTE: WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL: BATTERY TABS USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY
- USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND
TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF
WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING.
- USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND BATTERY HARNESSES (NOT
STATE OF CHARGE. SUPPLIED) TO CONNECT ONE
BLK + RED OR TWO ADDITIONAL BATTERIES
- USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY!
- IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED IN PARALLEL.
AT SAME TIME, EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME
WEAK.
- AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED,
DUAL
THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT
BATTERY
DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES.
HARNESS
(2 PAIRS
SUPPLIED) MAIN PCB
RE
K
BL D
AC
AC
D
K
BL
RE
OBSERVE POPARITY!
batt_conn-001-V0
+ +
12V
12V BATTERY
BATTERY (IF REQUIRED)
Figure 3-32: Connecting the Backup Batteries
3-32
S E C T I O N 4
Programming
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Program Modes
There are two programming modes for the VISTA- The factory-loaded defaults (✳97) enable
32FB/VISTA-128FB. These are the Data Field Program keypad addresses 00-01 only. An alpha keypad
Mode and the #93 Menu Mode. The Data Field Program set to one of these addresses must be used to
Mode is where many system options are programmed. program the system initially.
The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode that require
a 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160). Local keypad programming can be disabled
through Compass downloading software. If this
is done, Program mode can only be accessed
via the downloading software.
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode

Enter Programming mode using either method a or b: Exit the Programming mode by either method a or b:
a. Press both the [✳] and [#] keys at the same time a. Press [✳] + [9] + [8]. Exiting by this method
within 30 seconds after power is applied to the prevents the installer code from being used to re-
control. enter Programming mode. Only method “a” can be
b. Enter the Installer Code + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0] used to re-enter Programming mode.
keys. The factory installer code can be changed b. Press [✳] + [9] + [9]. Exiting by this method
once in the Program mode (field ✳00). permits the installer code to be being used to re-
NOTES: enter Programming mode.
The default Installer Code is 5140.
For VISTA-32FB enter Installer Code + [8] + [0] + [0].
Data Field Programming Mode

In the Data Field Program Mode you may access any Moving from One Page of Programming to Another
field simply by entering either [✳] or [#] + the field The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to
number: as “pages”). The first page is accessed as soon as
• To write or change information in a field press [✳] Programming Mode is entered.
+ the field number (✳03). The second and third pages of data fields are indicated
• To read the information in a field press [#] + the at the keypad by a 1 and 2, respectively, in front of the
field number (#03). 2-digit field address. “ALT PROGRAM MODE” is
When the entries for a field are completed, the keypad displayed along with a “100”, “200” or “300,” indicating
beeps three times and advances to the next field. which page of program fields is accessed.
To access the next level of programming fields:
SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING
COMMANDS 1 Press ✳94.
2 Press [✳] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of
✳91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields
the program field, and make the desired entry.
✳92 Display the software revision level of the control panel
NOTES:
✳93 Enter Menu mode programming Press ✳94 to move to 2 page, (fields 1✳01 - 1✳76);
nd
press ✳99 to move back to 1 page.

st
✳94 Go to next page of fields
Press ✳94 to move to 3 page (fields 2✳00 - 2✳88); press
rd
✳99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming
✳99 to move back to 2 page.
nd
Mode with no installer code lockout
Press ✳94 to move to 4 page, (fields 3✳00 - 3✳85);
th
✳98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout
press ✳99 to move back to 3 page.
rd
4-1
Entry Errors NOTE: If the number of digits that you enter in a data
• If an address is improperly entered, the keypad field is fewer than the maximum permitted (for
displays “FC.” example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last
• If a program entry is improperly entered (for entry and waits. To proceed, enter [✳] + the next data
example, a larger number than is permitted), the field you wish to program.
keypad display will go blank. Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields
In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✳] + the To program partition-specific data fields once in
correct field number and then enter the correct data. Program Mode, do the following:
Programming System-Wide Data Fields Step Action
Values for some programming fields are system-wide 1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0
(global), and some can be different for each partition 0.
(partition-specific).
2 Press ✳91, which will prompt you for the
The partition-specific programming fields are partition number desired.
automatically skipped when programming the
global fields. If the system has only 1 partition, 3 Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g.,
the partition-specific fields are not automatically ✳09) to begin programming.
skipped. When the first field’s entry is completed, the
next partition-specific field is automatically
To program system-wide data fields, perform the displayed. When all partition-specific fields
following steps: are programmed, the system returns to the
Step Action global programming fields (page 1 fields).
1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 0. 4 Repeat this procedure for each partition in
The following display appears: the installation.
NOTE: To return to the global program fields before
Program Mode
finishing all fields, enter any global field number.
✳Fill # View – 00
Programming Partition-Specific Fields
2 If the control has not been programmed before, Press ✳91 to select a partition.
enter ✳97 to load factory defaults. p
3 Press [✳] and enter the first field number to be Enter the partition to be programmed.
programmed (for example, ✳00, Installers p
Code). Make the desired entry. When the field Enter a partition-specific field number and make entry.
is complete, the keypad beeps three times and p
advances to the next field. If you do not want to
After partition-specific fields are programmed,
change the next field, press [✳] and enter the
next field number to be programmed. press ✳91 to select next partition.
First Page of fields

Enter any global field number to return to the global
(✳00 - ✳90) fields at any time.
To move to the next page of fields, press ✳94.
To return to the previous page, press ✳99.
4 Press ✳99 or ✳98 to exit Program Mode.
#93 Menu Mode Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode through After programming all system-related programming
which much of the system’s programming is done. In fields in the usual way, press #93 while still in
this mode, there are “question and answer” prompts programming mode to display the first choice of the
that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has menu-driven programming functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1
been entered. These prompts require a 2-line alpha (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.
keypad (6139/6160). Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence.
4-2
Section 4 – Programming
Below are the main menu selections. For details refer to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB Programming Guide.
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
ZONE PROG? For programming the following:

1 = YES 0 = NO 0 • Zone Number
• Zone Response Type
• Partition Number for Zone
• Dialer report code for zone
• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)
• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters & serial polling loop devices into the system.
EXPERT MODE? Same as Zone Programming except:

1 = YES 0 = NO 0 • Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.
• Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.
NOTE: All the zone attributes cannot be programmed using the Expert Mode.
REPORT CODE PROG? For programming the following:

1 = YES 0 = NO 0 • Alarm report codes for zones
• Restore and supervisory codes
• All other system report codes
ALPHA PROG? For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

1 = YES 0 = NO 0 • Zone Descriptors
• Installer’s Message
• Custom Words
• Partition Descriptors
• Relay Descriptors
DEVICE PROG? For defining the following device characteristics for addressable devices, including keypads, RF receivers
(5881), output relay modules (4204/4204CF), FSA (FSA-8/FSA-24), 4285/4286 VIP Module, ECP long range
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
radio (7845C), and VISTA Gateway Module:
• Device Address
• Device Type
• Keypad Options (including Partition assignment)
• RF House ID
• LRR Options (including Programming radio)
OUTPUT PGM? For defining output device functions.

1 = YES 0 = NO 0
RLY VOICE DESCR? For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 4285/4286 VIP Module.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
CUSTOM INDEX ? For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module annunciation.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
ACCESS POINT PGM For defining the parameters for each of the VistaKey zones, including which group(s) have access through
an access point (door). See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for detailed programming
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
instructions.
ACCESS GRP PGM For defining the capabilities (privileges) for each group of users. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for detailed programming instructions.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
EVENT/ACTION PGM For defining events and time windows for an access group. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for detailed programming instructions.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
4-3
Following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode:
#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands
#93 Enters Menu Mode.
[✳] Serves as [ENTER] key. Press to have keypad accept entry.
[#] Backs up to previous screen.
0 Press to answer NO.
1 Press to answer YES.
00, or 000+[✳] Quits Menu Mode and goes back to Data Field Programming Mode, if entered at first prompt of each main menu option.
Zone Number Designations

The VISTA-32FB supports up to 32 zones, the VISTA- Zone Index
128FB supports up to 128 zones, of hardwire, polling
The zones are designated as follows:
loop and/or wireless protection, distributed among up to
8 partitions. The following table lists the zone numbers ZONE # ZONE
ACTUAL ZONE
and the types of sensors that can be used with each, RANGE FUNCTION
and some alternate functions of the zones. 001 – 128 Protection As indicated
Zone Function zones
1&2 2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used) 601 – 632 Relay 6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,
Supervisory Relay Number 03, if supervised,
5 Audio Alarm Verification (if used) Zones is zone 603.
6 Cabinet Tamper/Ground Fault (if used) 800 – 830 ECP Device 8 + 2-digit Device Address;
7 Keyswitch (if used) Supervisory e.g., Device Address 01, if
Zones supervised, is zone 801.
8 Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)
4285/4286 VIP Module is zone
1- Traditional Hardwired Zones 804 (because its Device
1-128 5800 Series Wireless Devices Address must be set to 4).
970-977, System 970: Bell 1Output
10-128 Polling Loop Devices
988, 990, & Supervisory 971 Bell 2 Output
995 ✳ + 1 Panic 997 Zones 972 Earth Ground
996 # + 3 Panic 973 J2 Input 1 (LRR)
974 Dialer 1
999 ✳ + # Panic
975 Dialer 2
Zone Defaults 976 Auxiliary Relay
977 J2 LRR Trigger Outputs
Zone # Zone Type Zone # Zone Type 988: 2nd Wireless Receiver –
001 09 800-830 00 not receiving signals
990: 1st Wireless Receiver –
002 03 970 00 not receiving signals
003 03 971-974 19 997: Polling Loop (short
circuit)
004 03 975 00
992, 995 – Duress and 992: Duress
005 03 988 & 990 00 999 Keypad Panics 995: 1 + ✳ panic (A key)
006 03 992 N/A 996: 3 + # panic (C key)
007 03 995 00 999: ✳ + # panic (B key)
008 03 996 00 Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 05
(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night) or 19 (24-Hour Trouble).
010–128 00 997 19
601-632 00 999 06
NOTE: Zone 992 is the Duress zone. This zone does not
require a zone type, only the report code programming.
4-4
Communication Defaults
*45 PRIMARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID *51 DUAL REPORTING [0] no
*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Prim) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed *52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
*47 SECONDARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard
Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat
*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed
*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0] [0]
No checksum Primary Secondary
[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard
Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat
*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SEL. [0] Radionics
Communication Defaults for Zones
ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd
1 01 00 37 11 00 73 06 00 109 01 00
2 02 00 38 12 00 74 07 00 110 02 00
3 03 00 39 13 00 75 08 00 111 03 00
4 04 00 40 14 00 76 09 00 112 04 00
5 05 00 41 15 00 77 10 00 113 05 00
6 06 00 42 01 00 78 11 00 114 06 00
7 07 00 43 02 00 79 12 00 115 07 00
8 08 00 44 03 00 80 13 00 116 08 00
9 09 00 45 04 00 81 14 00 117 09 00
10 10 00 46 05 00 82 15 00 118 10 00
11 11 00 47 06 00 83 01 00 119 11 00
12 12 00 48 07 00 84 02 00 120 12 00
13 13 00 49 08 00 85 03 00 121 13 00
14 14 00 50 09 00 86 04 00 122 14 00
15 15 00 51 10 00 87 05 00 123 15 00
16 01 00 52 11 00 88 06 00 124 01 00
17 02 00 53 12 00 89 07 00 125 02 00
18 03 00 54 13 00 90 08 00 126 03 00
19 04 00 55 14 00 91 09 00 127 04 00
20 05 00 56 15 00 92 10 00 128 05 00
21 06 00 57 01 00 93 11 00 601-632 00 00
22 07 00 58 02 00 94 12 00 800-830 00 00
23 08 00 59 03 00 95 13 00 970 00 00
24 09 00 60 04 00 96 14 00 988 00 00
25 10 00 61 09 00 97 15 00 990 00 00
26 11 00 62 10 00 98 05 00 992 (DURESS) 11 00
27 12 00 63 11 00 99 06 00 995 00 00
28 13 00 64 12 00 100 07 00 996 00 00
29 14 00 65 13 00 101 08 00 997 06 00
30 15 00 66 14 00 102 09 00 999 06 00
31 05 00 67 15 00 103 10 00 ALARM RST. 00 00
32 06 00 68 01 00 104 11 00 TROUBLE 00 00
33 07 00 69 02 00 105 12 00 TRBLE. RST 00 00
34 08 00 70 03 00 106 13 00 BYPASS 00 00
35 09 00 71 04 00 107 14 00 BYP. RST. 00 00
36 10 00 72 05 00 108 15 00
Zone Response Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary
the way in which the system responds to faults in that Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and
zone. There are three keypad-activated zones (panic the system is armed in the AWAY or STAY mode. When
keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM
supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two mode, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay begins
for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined whenever the control is armed, regardless of the arming
below. mode selected. These delays are programmable.
Type 00: Zone Not Used Assign this zone type to zones that are used for primary
Program with this zone type if the zone is not used. entry to and exit from the facility.
4-5
Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm
Provides a secondary entry delay, if the system is Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm
armed in the AWAY or STAY modes and the zone is sound at the keypad only. (No other Notification
faulted. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or Appliance Circuit is activated.) Assign this zone
MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided. type to a zone an Emergency button or one containing
Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is monitoring devices such as water sensors or
armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These temperature sensors.
delays are programmable.
Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry
and exit of the facility and require more time than the Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble
condition on open circuit. A fire alarm produces a
primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone
type must be greater than those for zone type 01 (e.g., a pulsing of the Notification Appliance Circuit. A zone of
this type is always active and cannot be bypassed.
garage, loading dock, or basement door).
Type 03: Perimeter Burglary Type 10: Interior with Delay
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed
entry and exit delay times) when armed in the AWAY
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or
mode. Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are
MAXIMUM mode.
violated, regardless of whether or not an entry/exit
Assign this zone type to all exterior doors and windows. delay zone was tripped first. Provides only exit delay
Type 04: Interior, Follower when armed in the MAXIMUM mode (no entry delay).
Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry Interior with Delay zones are automatically bypassed
delay time) if an entry/exit zone is faulted first. when the panel is armed in the STAY or INSTANT
Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active mode.
when the system is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as
mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass
delay. upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Interior Follower zones are automatically bypassed Type 16: Fire With Verification
when the panel is armed in the STAY or INSTANT
Provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble
mode.
condition on open circuit. An initial short causes 7-
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as second smoke detector power reset. Any subsequent
a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass short within 90 seconds causes a fire alarm. A fire
upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad). alarm produces a pulsing of the Notification Appliance
Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Circuit. This type is always active and can only be
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the bypassed by the Installer code or the Master code, (field
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or 3✳85).
MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the Type 17: Fire Waterflow
system annunciates a latched trouble sounding from Provides a trouble condition on open circuit and an
the keypad (and a central station report, if desired). alarm on a short circuit that remains longer than the
Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foil- programmed time delay (fields 3✳16 and 3✳18). The
protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a alarm can be silenced by either an entry of User Code
zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room or + OFF or when the zone restores (field 3✳14). This type
drug supply room. It can also be used on a zone in an is always active and can only be bypassed by the
area where immediate notification of an entry is Installer code or the Master code, (field 3✳85).
desired.
Type 18: Fire Supervisory
Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm
Provides a supervisory response on a short circuit. Open
Sends a report to the central station but provides no circuit can be programmed for either a trouble or
keypad display or sounding. Assign this zone type to a supervisory response (field 3✳13). This type is always
zone containing an Emergency button. active and can only be bypassed by the Installer code or
Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm the Master code, (field 3✳85).
Sends a report to the central station and provides an Type 19: 24-Hour Trouble
alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external Provides a trouble response on a short or open circuit.
alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an No alarm sounders are activated.
Emergency button.
Type 20: Arm-STAY (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the
zone is activated.
4-6
Type 21: Arm-AWAY (5800 Series devices only) Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision
Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the Used to supervise the MLB. If communication between
zone is activated. the MLB and the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM) fails,
Type 22: Disarm (5800 Series devices only) a trouble condition is annunciated for the zone. Also, if
Causes the system to disarm when the zone is the communication fails, all access control system
activated. (ACS) input zones also display a “CHECK.”
Type 23: No Alarm Response Type 29: Momentary Exit
Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired, Used to cause an access point programmed for entry to
but with no accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door revert to an exit point for 15 seconds. After the 15
access). seconds, it automatically reverts back to an entry point.
Use this zone type only with VistaKey modules.
Type 27: Access Point
Assign this zone type to an input device (hardwired NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the
zone, wireless zone, keypad, access control relay, etc.) same zone response type for all 8 partitions, but panics
that controls an access entry point (e.g., a door). The may be individually enabled for each partition.
access point entry relay can be assigned to an access
control relay (controlled by the VISTA-32FB/VISTA- IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION
128FB), ECP relay (4204), or to the access control Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990, and 997)
system independent of the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB. report as trouble conditions only, and as such, should be
assigned zone type 19 if annunciation is desired. See
Polling Loop Supervision and RF System Operation and
Supervision in SECTION 3: Installing the Control for more
information.
Zone Input Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned an input type, which Type 07 DIP Switch Loop (DP)
defines the where the system will “look” for status of Select for polling loop devices that use DIP switches for
the zone (RF receiver, polling loop, etc.). Zone input programming the zone number of the device.
types are defined below. Type 08 Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS)
Type 01 Hardwired (HW) Select for the second loop of two-zone polling loop
Reserved for the built-in hardwired zones 1-8. devices (e.g., 4190WH; 4278).
Type 03 Supervised RF (RF) Type 09 Console Input (CS)
Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will be Select when this zone is to be controlled by a keypad
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter must input (user code + [#] + [7] + [3]) for access control.
remain within the receiver’s range. Type 10 PassPoint Access Control (ACS)
Type 04 Unsupervised RF (UR) Select when this zone is mapped to a zone on the
Select for 5800 Series transmitters that will not be PassPoint Access Control System.
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter may Type11 VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM)
therefore be carried off-premises.
Select this input type when using a VistaKey module
Type 05 Unsupervised Button RF (BR) connected to a door. This must be programmed for each
Select for 5800 Series transmitters specifically designed VistaKey module to provide the DSM zone mapping a
for this input type. These transmitters send only fault panel zone. If this is not programmed the panel will not
signals. They do not send low-battery signals until they “see” the VistaKey module.
are activated. The transmitter may be carried off- It is also used to determine the door is opened after a
premises. card swipe or if the door is being held open. The device
Type 06 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) is normally a magnetic switch mounted on the door.
Use for V-Plex devices with a built-in serial number. The status of the switch is different when the door is in
For VistaKey, select this type for Door Status Monitor an open position.
Backup DSMB. If local power to the VistaKey is lost, a Type 12 VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE)
V-Plex SIM, located on the VistaKey board, is powered Use this input type to map an uncommitted RTE zone
directly from the polling loop and reports the state of to an alarm panel zone. This input type is not normally
the DSM via the standard V-Plex polling system. used if the zone is used for a request-to-exit function.
NOTE: To obtain the DSMB function, the Input Type Type 13 VistaKey General Purpose (GP)
must be defined as 06, and the next prompt in Zone This input type operates in the same manner as other
Programming (Access Point) must contain the Access alarm panel zones and is provided so that a zone in the
Point number (01-8) (address of the VistaKey module). proximity of the VistaKey can be wired without having
to run additional wiring from the control panel.
4-7
Programming the Control for the Pager

• In field *64 enter 1 to enable the 4100APG pager • In field *72 enter the Pager ID number of the
interface. paging service for Open/Close reports. This is the
• In field *65 enter the phone number of the paging PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
service for Alarm reports. Up to 17 digits may be • In field *73 enter the phone number of the paging
entered. service for System reports. Up to 17 digits may be
• In field *66 enter the Pager ID number of the entered.
paging service for Alarm reports. This is the PIN • In field *74 enter the Pager ID number of the
number. Up to 10 digits may be entered. paging service for System reports. This is the PIN
• In field *67 enter the phone number of the paging number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
service for Trouble reports. Up to 17 digits may be • In field *75 enter the phone number of the paging
entered. service for Test reports. Up to 17 digits may be
• In field *68 enter the Pager ID number of the entered.
paging service for Trouble reports. This is the PIN • In field *76 enter the Pager ID number of the
number. Up to 10 digits may be entered. paging service for Test reports. This is the PIN
• In field *69 enter the phone number of the paging number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
service for Bypass reports. Up to 17 digits may be • In field 1*70 enable the events for the event log.
entered. • In field 1*72 enable the Printer On-Line option.
• In field *70 enter the Pager ID number of the This must be turned on to allow events to be sent to
paging service for Bypass reports. This is the PIN the pager interface when they occur.
number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.
Field 3*19 MUST be programmed with a “1” in
• In field *71 enter the phone number of the paging
order for the printer and pager to operate
service for Open/Close reports. Up to 17 digits may
properly.
be entered.
Programming for Access Control

VistaKey Using ACS Zone Inputs
See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these
the detailed programming instructions. may be used by the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB as
hardwired zones. To program for ACS zone inputs,
VistaKey Dialer Enables
perform the following steps:
When the VistaKey is installed with an alarm system,
the system defaults are set so that the system does not Step Action
send reports to the central station. The programming is 1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
accomplished in field 1∗35 for the following events: Mode.
• ACS Troubles - To enable or disable ACS trouble 2 Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate
reporting. the input type as ACS (10).
• ACS Bypasses - To enable or disable ACS bypass
3 Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31)
reporting.
• ACS System - To enable or disable ACS system See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
reporting, (i.e., ACS module reset). detailed explanation.
• ACS Alarms - To enable or disable ACS alarm PassPoint Dialer Events
reporting. All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA-
• Dialer (Trace) - To enable or disable access 32FB/VISTA-128FB dialer via the VGM. These events
grant/denial events sent to the central station. will also be logged into the control’s event log. This is
The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the PassPoint ACS
use as regular control panel hardwired zones (the zone documentation for a detailed explanation.
response type is ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also Programming the VISTA Gateway Module
utilize the control panel dialer for reports to the central
See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the
station.
VISTA Gateway Module.
4-8
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using VistaKey Using Wireless Keypads
or PassPoint Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another
The control can send entry and exit requests to the way of entering or exiting the premises. They function
VistaKey or PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads and the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73
button-type (BR) RF transmitters. A zone is is entered. This entry will allow momentary access to
programmed with a response type 27 (Access Point) and ALL access points in the partition to which the keypad
an appropriate input type (console, RF). is assigned To program the wireless keypad, enter the
partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1*48.
Using the Alpha Keypad
Step Action Control of Lighting and Appliances
1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an
Mode. access or exit event occurs. Lights or appliances can be
automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or
2 Program the zone with a response type 27 egress request is presented at an access point. To
(Access Point). control these devices, the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB
3 Enter the access point number (00-31) of the relays or the ACS relays or triggers are used with
door. keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response type is
4 Program whether this is an entry or exit point. Access Point (27).
5 Enter the partition number. To program the control of lighting and appliances,
6 Enter the input type as CS (09). perform the following steps:
7 Enter the keypad ECP address. Step Action
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a 1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
detailed explanation. Mode.
Using an RF Transmitter Zone 2 Program all the information for the relay.
A button type RF transmitter (5804) can be used to 3 Select the output type: ECP (1) (4204/4204CF).
provide access or egress for up to 4 doors. One button
See Output Programming in the Programming Guide
will control one door. Also, a button can be used to
for a detailed explanation.
provide access or egress due to a panic or duress
condition. Using the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB for Stand-Alone
An RF transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote Access Control
switch to provide exit in case of a fire alarm using a The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB can be used for access
PassPoint event action. control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS or
To program the RF transmitter for access control, VistaKey. A user can trigger an access point (i.e., door
perform the following steps: strike) for 2 seconds by entering User Code + [0].
Step Action To program the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB for Stand-
Alone access control, perform the following steps:
1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode. Step Action
2 Program the zone with a response type 27 1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
(Access Point). Mode.
3 Enter the access point (00-31) of the door. 2 Program the output type as 1, or 2.
4 Indicate whether RF device is for entry or exit. 3 For type 1, program the ECP address and
5 Enter the partition number relay number.
6 Enter the input type: button RF (05). 4 For type 2, program the house and unit codes.
7 Enter the loop number. 5 Program the relay number in field 1∗76
8 Enroll the serial number (partition-specific).
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a See Output Programming in the Programming Guide
detailed explanation. for a detailed explanation.
• RF buttons and pendants must be assigned

to a user number in order to function. See
the SECTION 9: User Access Codes for the
procedure.
• An RF transmitter will not provide access or
grant if the system is in any test mode.
4-9
Programming for ECP Long Range Radio

• Program the LRR in Device Programming in the • Program field ✳58: Selects events for the primary
#93 Menu Mode Programming. sub’s ID
• Program field ✳56: Selects the time the panel • Program field ✳59: Selects events for the secondary
should wait before it attempts to send a message to sub’s ID.
the second destination..
• Program field ✳57: Selects the initial reporting
destination for messages.
Programming for the Event Log

• Program field 1✳70 Event Log Types (1=enable; • Program field 1✳73 Printer Baud Rate (1=300;
0=disable for each type) 0=1200)
• Program field 1✳71 12/24-Hour Time Stamp • Program Event Log Report Codes System Group
Format (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr) #2 in the #93 Menu Mode.
• Program field 1✳72 Event Log Printer On-line
(0=disable; 1=enable)
4-10
S E C T I O N 5
Data Field Descriptions

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Data Field Programming

The following pages list this control’s data fields in numerical order. Field numbers are listed in the left column, followed
by a “Title and Data Entries column, which lists the valid entries for each field. Experienced installers can simply follow
this column when programming the data fields. The “Explanation” column provides explanatory information and special
notes where applicable.
NOTE: Refer to the Programming Guide for the default values. They are not listed in this section.
Use the Programming Guide to record the data for this installation.
Programming Data Fields

Data field programming involves making the appropriate entries for each of the data fields. Start Data Field
programming by entering the installer code + 8 + 0 + 0 + 0. (For the VISTA-32FB enter installer code + 8 + 0 + 0.)
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
07 Installer Code The Installer Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use.
000 Enter 4 digits, 0-9 This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the
keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it isn’t used to arm
the system. This code cannot be used to re-enter Program Mode if Program
Mode is exited by the *98 command.
If enabled, the pulse rate for an output programmed for pulsing (field 3✳15)
07 080 Temporal Siren Pulse
will be three dings and a pause, repeated. If disabled, the pulse rate will be
0 = disable
1 = enable one second on, one second off.
07 Entry Delay #1 (partition-specific) Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re-enter the premises
090 Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds. through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm
00 = no delay. the system without sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within
this period or an alarm will occur.
07 Exit Delay #1 (partition-specific) Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises
100 Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds. through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after
00 = no delay. arming the system without setting off the alarm.
07 Entry Delay #2 (partition-specific) Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than
110 Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds. those assigned to Entry Delay #1.
00 = no delay.
07 Exit Delay #2 (partition-specific) Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those
120 Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds. assigned to Exit Delay #1.
00 = no delay. NOTE: The delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL installations.
07 Bell 1 Timeout Defines the length of time the Bell 1 Output and the keypad’s sounder will
130 Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes. sound for all audible alarms.
00 = no timeout. Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations
and a minimum 6 minutes for UL commercial fire installations.
5-1
07 Keyswitch Assignment The keyswitch requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer
150 Enter 1-8 partition keyswitch is being used. available as protection zone). The fire and panic alarm voltage triggers (J2)
Enter 9 if the keyswitch is being used to automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for the Keyswitch
silence fire Notification Appliance Circuits in LEDs.
the event of a fire alarm. Openings/closing report as user “0” if enabled in field *40.
Enter 0 if the keyswitch is not used.
07 Bell 1 Confirmation of Arming If enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of
160 exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).
Ding (partition-specific)
0 = disable Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.
1 = enable
07 AC Loss Keypad Sounding If enabled, sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) occurs when AC power is
170 0 = disable lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).
1 = enable
07 Randomize AC Loss Report If disabled, AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss.
190 0 = disable Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the
1 = randomize for 10-40 min. after AC Loss central station during a community blackout.
2 = randomize for 6-12 hours after AC Loss
07 VIP Module Phone Code If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used
200 1-9 = first digit of access code to access the system.
or # = second digit of access code (enter # Must be disabled for UL installations.
+11 for “∗”, or # +12 for “#”)
To disable enter 00 for the 1st digit
07 Keypad Panic Enables (partition- If enabled, the keypad panics (zones 995, 996, and 999) may be used in this
220 partition. There are 3 entries in this field, one for each panic.
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Multiple Alarms (partition- If enabled, allows more than one alarm sounding for a given zone during an
230 armed period.
specific)
0 = disable NOTE: that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than
1 = enable allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This has no impact on
the number of communication messages transmitted.
Must be 1 for UL installations.
07 Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper If disabled, the system monitors the tampers on expansion zones.
240 0 = disable (tamper detection) NOTE: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or
1 = enable (no tamper detection) 5800 Series transmitters.
07 Burglary Trigger for Response If enabled, allows triggering of the voltage output 3 on Pin 3 of the J2 header
250 to include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).
Type 8
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Intelligent Test Report If enabled, no test report is sent if any other type of report was sent since the
260 0 = disable last test report.
1 = enable If disabled, test reports are sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or
not any other report has been sent.
Must be 0 for UL applications.
Test Report Interval

07
If a test report is desired, enter a test code in Report Code Programming in
270 Enter 001-999 for the test report interval in #93 Menu Mode. Set first test report time in field *83.
hours. Maximum Test report interval is 024 for UL commercial installations.
Enter 000 for test reporting.
5-2
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
07 Power-Up in Previous State If enabled, the system, upon power-up, reverts to its status prior to a complete
280 0 = disable power loss.
1 = enable If disabled, the system always powers up in a disarmed state.
NOTE: Neither authority level 0 nor 5 can be used to disarm the system if the
control powers up armed.
Must be 1 for UL applications.
07 Quick Arm (partition-specific) If enabled, allows arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT,
290 0 = disable or MAXIMUM mode by using the [#] key instead of the user code.
1 = enable NOTES:
When armed, the system reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for
User #2 (typically a Master level user) was enabled for a given partition.
If Quick Arm is used, the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot
disarm the system.
07 Main Dialer TouchTone or Rotary Select the dialing method for the main dialer.
300
Dial
0 = rotary
1 = touchtone
If you select TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service. Note that
whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling
(ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for TouchTone w/Rotary backup
07 PABX Access Code This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers representing the prefix
310 Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15) needed to obtain an outside telco line. If not required, enter nothing and
proceed to next field.
07 Primary Subscriber’s Account Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account
320 number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of
Number (partition-specific)
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.
07 Primary Phone Number Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits. This is the
330 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to
second pause. the central station. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is
entered.
07 Secondary Phone Number Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits. The secondary phone
340 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if
second pause. split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account number
(field *90) must also be programmed.
07 Download Phone Number Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits. Do not fill unused
350 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- spaces.
second pause. NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.
07 Download ID Number Enter eight digits.

360 Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows: NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.
00=0 01=1 02=2 03=3 04=4 05=5
06=6 07=7 08=8 09=9 10=A 11=B
12=C 13=D 14=E 15=F
07 Download Command Enables Enabling a function means that you are able to perform that function via the
370 0 = disable ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.
1 = enable Functions are as follows: Dialer Shutdown; System Shutdown; Not Used;
Remote Bypass; Remote Disarm; Remote Arm; Upload Program; Download
Program.
For UL commercial burglary and fire installations, all entries must be 0.
5-3
07 Prevent Zone XXX Bypass Enter three digits for zone that cannot be bypassed by the user.
380 NOTES:
(partition-specific)
Enter a zone number (001-128). The actions manual bypass and STAY/INSTANT arming modes cannot
Enter 000 if all zones can be bypassed. bypass any zone programmed in this field.
07 Enable Open/Close Report for If enabled, whenever the Installer Code is used to arm or disarm the partition,
390 an open/close report is sent to the central station.
Installer Code (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Enable Open/Close report for If enabled, whenever the keyswitch is used to arm or disarm the partition, an
400 open/close report is sent to the central station.
Keyswitch
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones If disabled, end-of-line resistors must be used on zones 3-8.
410 If enabled end-of-line resistors cannot be used and only normally closed
3-8)
0 = disable devices must be used.
1 = enable Must be 0 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
07 Dial Tone Pause Enter the time the system waits for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true dial
420 Enter the wait time for dial tone detection: tone is not selected in field *43.
0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; 2 = 30 Must be 0 for UL installations.
seconds.
07 Dial Tone Detection If enabled, the system waits for true dial tone. If no dial tone is detected,
430 0 = disable control dials at end of pause programmed in field *42.
1 = enable If disabled, the system pauses for seconds entered in field *42, then dials.
NOTE: Disabling may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks
where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.
07 Ring Detection Count Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-initiated
440 Enter 00 to disable ring detection. downloading will be used.
Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14. NOTES:
Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.
Mode In the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once,
then hang up, and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing
one ring followed by nothing, does not answer the first call, but readies itself to
pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30
seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).
Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
07 Primary Format Enter the reporting format for the primary telephone number.
450 0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
07 Low Speed Format (Primary) Enter the low speed format for the primary telephone number.
460 0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
07 Secondary Format Enter the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.
470 0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
07 Low Speed Format (Secondary) Enter the low speed format for the secondary telephone number.
480 0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
5-4
07 Checksum Verification If enabled, the system for either or both primary/secondary formats sends a
490 Enter 2 digits, one for the primary and one verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send
for the secondary. two message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Sescoa/Radionics Select If disabled, selects Radionics, which uses hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.
500 0 = disable If enabled, selects Sescoa, which uses only numeric reporting (0-9).
1 = enable NOTE: The selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.
07 Dual Reporting If enabled, all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone
510 0 = disable numbers.
1 = enable NOTE: If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both primary
and secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If used
with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both, open/close and test
messages go to secondary only, while all other reports go to primary. If used
with Split Reporting option 3, fire alarms and supervisory reports go to
primary, all other reports go to secondary.
07 Standard/Expanded Reporting This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
520 Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
Primary
primary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *45.
0 = disable
1 = enable NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
07 Standard/Expanded Reporting This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
530 Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
Secondary
secondary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *47.
0 = disable
1 = enable NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
07 Dynamic Signaling Delay Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first
560 Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds. reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination (first and second destinations are determined in field ✳57).
NOTE: If the acknowledgment is received before the delay time expires, no
message is sent to the second destination.
07 Dynamic Signaling Priority Select the initial reporting path for central station messages.
570 0 = Primary Dialer
1 = Long Range Radio
07 Long Range Radio Central This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
580 System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the primary subscriber ID of
Station #1 Category Enable
the Long Range Radio.
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Long Range Radio Central This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
590 System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the secondary subscriber ID
Station #2 Category Enable
of the Long Range Radio.
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Alpha Numeric Pager Installed Enable if the Alpha Numeric Pager Interface (4100APG) is installed.
640 0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Pager Phone Number for Alarms Enter the paging service phone number for Alarm reports. Enter up to 17
650 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- digits. Do not fill unused spaces.
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for Alarms Enter the Pager ID number for Alarm reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
660 Enter 0-9
5-5
07 Pager Phone Number for Enter the paging service phone number for Trouble reports. Enter up to 17
670 digits. Do not fill unused spaces.
Supervision
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for Supervision Enter the Pager ID number for Trouble reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
680 Enter 0-9
07 Pager Phone Number for Enter the paging service phone number for Bypass reports. Enter up to 17
690 digits. Do not fill unused spaces.
Bypasses
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for Bypasses Enter the Pager ID number for Bypass reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
700 Enter 0-9
07 Pager Phone Number for Enter the paging service phone number for Open/Close reports. Enter up to
710 17 digits. Do not fill unused spaces.
Opens/Closes
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for Enter the Pager ID number for Open/Close reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
720
Open/Closes
Enter 0-9
07 Pager Phone Number for System Enter the paging service phone number for System reports. Enter up to 17
730 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- digits. Do not fill unused spaces.
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for System Enter the Pager ID number for System reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
740 Enter 0-9
07 Pager Phone Number for Test Enter the paging service phone number for Test reports. Enter up to 17 digits.
750 Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2- Do not fill unused spaces.
second pause.
07 Pager ID Number for Test Enter the Pager ID number for Test reports. Enter up to 10 digits.
760 Enter 0-9
07 Zone Type Restores for Zone This field has eight entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
790 will send Restore reports.
Types 1-8
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 Zone Type Restores for Zone This field has two entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
800 will send Restore reports.
Types 9 & 10
0 = disable
1 = enable
07 First Test Report Time Enter the day and time that the first Test report shall be transmitted. Enter 00
830 Enter 00-07the for day (01 = Monday) in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting. Enter
Enter 00-23 for the hour 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the
Enter 00-59 for the minutes time that is set.
07 Swinger Suppression (partition- This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a
840 specific zone in an armed period. The system automatically resets the
specific)
shutdown for a zone after 48 hours if there are no trips on any zone.
Enter 01-15.
Enter 00 for unlimited reports Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
5-6
07 Enable Dialer Reports for Panics This field has four entries as follows: Zone 995, 996, 999, Duress Enable for
850 each partition that the panics and duress reporting is desired.
& Duress (partition-specific)
0 = disable NOTE: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to
1 = enable enable Duress reporting.
07 Entry Warning (partition-specific) Select the type of warning for the entry delay period.
870 0 = 3 short beeps
1 = slow continuous beeps
07 Burglary Alarm Communicator Select the delay, if any, for burglary alarm communications.
880 Must be 0 for UL installations.
Delay (partition-specific)
0 = no delay
1 = 16-second delay
07 Restore Report Timing Select the time when restore reports are sent after an alarm.
890 0 = instant Must be 2 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
1 = after bell timeout
2 = when system is disarmed
07 Secondary Subscriber Account Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account
900 number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of
Number (partition-specific)
hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth location.
NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used
(field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary account
number.
17170 Lobby Partition

0 = none
Select the Common Lobby Partition.
1-8 = partition number
17180 Affects Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable
If enabled, causes lobby partition to disarm when this partition disarms.
NOTE: This partition must be armed before lobby can be armed.
1 = enable
17190 Arms Lobby (partition-specific)

0 = disable
If enabled, arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the lobby
partition. Field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).
1 = enable NOTES:
The lobby cannot be armed unless all partitions programmed for “affect” (field
1*18) is already armed.
If his field is enabled, Field 1*18 for this partition must also be enabled.
17200 Exit Error Logic Enable

0 = disable
If enabled, the system at the end of exit delay, if an entry door or an interior
zone is left open, starts the entry delay period, and activates the Notification
1 = enable Appliance Circuit(s), and keypad sounders for the duration of entry delay.
This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the system
before exit error occurs.
If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system
bypasses the faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system
is armed. Also, the following dialer reports are sent to the central station if
programmed:
Exit Error by User (not sent when is using ADEMCO High Speed format);
Entry/Exit or Interior Alarm with the zone number;
Bypass reports.
UL Exit Error Logic is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).
5-7
17210 Exit Delay Reset

0 = disable
If enabled, when the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the
user exits, closes the door and then re-enters the premises, the exit delay
1 = enable time is reset to the programmed value.
NOTES:
Exit Delay Reset is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to
retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm.
This feature may only be activated once after arming.
UL Exit Delay Reset is not suitable for use in a UL installation (must be 0).
Cross-Zoning
Cross Zoning is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5-minute period of each other (whereas
the first zone remains faulted, when the second zone trips) to cause an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary faults
from either of the zones from causing an alarm condition. You can select four "sets" of cross-zones (programmed in data fields
1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25), keeping in mind the following:
• Both zones in each set must protect the same area.
• When cross-zoning motion sensors, both device’s areas of protection must be situated so that both units will trip at the
same time if their shared protected area is violated.
• Both zones in each set must be in the same partition.
• A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area (see warning below).
DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. Cross a fire zone with another fire
zone only, and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). Consult
! NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements. We recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no
farther than 30 ft.
Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation

• If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-zoning feature does not apply.
• If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the entry/exit zone as the first zone of the
pair. This ensures that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.
• If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay activates without the other zone being faulted.
• If a relay is programmed to activate on an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip before the relay activates, and both
zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).
If the one of the zones trips and the second zone does not trip within the 5-minute period, an “error” message is
reported to the central station. The Contact ID event code is 378.
17220 Cross Zoning Pair One

Enter 001-128
Select the first pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-
minute period to cause an alarm.
Enter 000,000 to disable Must be 000,000 for UL commercial burglary installations.
17230 Cross Zoning Pair Two

Enter 001-128
Select the second pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
17240 Cross Zoning Pair Three

Enter 001-128
Select the third pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-
17250 Cross Zoning Pair Four

Enter 001-128
Select the fourth pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a five-
5-8
17260 Panic Button or Speedkey

For A, B, C keys:
Select for the A, B, and C keys whether the system performs a panic or a
speedkey function when the key is pressed.
00 = panic function Select for the D key whether the system performs a specific macro or if the
01-35 = macro number user will select a macro when the key is pressed.
Instead of the 32 programmable speedkey functions the keys can be
For D key:
programmed for 3 other functions as follows:
00 = to select a macro to execute when key
is pressed 33 = fire sounder silence. The key, when pressed, silences fire alarms.
01-35 = macro number 34 = display next fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad to
display the next fire alarm in the system.
35 = display previous fire alarm. The key, when pressed, causes the keypad
to display the previous fire alarm in the system.
NOTE: Selection 33 functions when field 3✳15 is enabled for pulsing.
Selections 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with Fire Display Lock
(field 3✳01).
NOTE: If a user code with global arm/disarm is used to execute the macro,
the user’s global capabilities will override any arm/disarm commands in the
macro sequence.
17280 RF Transmitter Low Battery Select when the RF transmitter low-battery condition should display and
audible beep annunciate on the keypad.
Sound
0 = disarmed state only Must be 1 for UL installations.
1 = both armed and disarmed states
17290 RF Transmitter Low Battery If enabled, the system sends a Trouble message for RF transmitter low-
battery condition to the central station.
Reporting
0 = disable NOTE: The Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure,
1 = enable independent of this selection.
17300 RF Receiver Supervision Check- Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF receiver(s).
Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered results in
in Interval
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours). the activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first
00 = disable receiver supervision. receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related
communication reports.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.
17310 RF Transmitter Check-in Interval Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF transmitters.
Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
00 = disable transmitter supervision. entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.
17330 TouchTone with Rotary Backup

0 = disable
If enabled, the system reverts to rotary dialing if communicator is not
successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.
1 = enable
17340 Communicator Split Reporting

0 = Split Reporting disabled
Select the type of split reporting for system communication.
NOTE: See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.
1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore, and Cancel
reports to primary, all others to secondary
2 = Open/Close and Test reports to
secondary, all other reports to primary
3 = Fire Alarms and Fire Restores to
primary, all others to secondary
17350 Access Control Dialer Enables

0 = disable
There are six entries for this field as follows: Trace, Trouble, Not Used,
Bypass, System, Alarm.
1 = enable If Trace is enabled, access grant/denial events sent to the central station.
For the other events, if enabled, a report is sent to the central station.
5-9
17420 Call Waiting Defeat

0 = disable
If enabled, the system defeats Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to
both the primary and secondary numbers.
1 = enable NOTES:
After the panel’s initial call to report the alarm, the panel may attempt to make
an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral. If Call Waiting is
not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to contact the
premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) hears the phone ringing
indefinitely and must to dispatch on the call.
DO NOT enable this feature unless Call Waiting is being used.
17430 Permanent Keypad Display If enabled, backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.
Otherwise the backlighting comes on when a key is pressed.
Backlighting (partition-specific)
0 = disable NOTE: When a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in
1 = enable that partition.
17440 Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect

0 = disable
If enabled, when more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid
sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel disables the wireless keypad.
1 = enable The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired
keypad.
17450 Exit Delay Sounding (partition- If enabled, the system produces slow beeping from the keypads during exit
delay and reverts to rapid beeping during the last 10 seconds of the exit delay.
specific)
0 = disable NOTE: The duration of the beeping is the programmed value of field *10
1 = enable regardless of which entry/exit zone is used to exit the premises.
17470 Chime on Bell 1 (partition- If enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the Bell 1 output.
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
17480 Wireless Keypad Assignment

0 = none
Select the partition in which RF keypad is used.
1-8 = partition number
17490 Suppress Transmitter If enabled, no trouble soundings occur on the keypad for transmitter check-in
failures.
Supervision Sound
0 = disable Must be 0 for UL installations.
1 = enable
17520 Send Cancel If Alarm + Off If enabled, Cancel reports are sent when the system is disarmed after an
alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by.
0 = disable If disabled, Cancel reports are sent within Bell Timeout period only.
1 = enable NOTE: This option must be enabled so Cancel reports are always sent.
17530 Disable Download Callback

0 = callback required
Select whether a callback from the control panel is required for downloading.
1 = no callback required
17560 AC 60Hz or 50Hz

0 = 60Hz
Select the frequency for the AC.
Must be set to 0 for U.S. and Canadian installations.
1 = 50Hz
17570 Enable 5800 RF Button Global If enabled, the system arms/disarms in accordance with the button’s user’s
global arming settings.
Arm
0 = disable
1 = enable
5-10
17580 Enable 5800 RF Button Force If enabled, allows the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones
when arming the system.
Arm
0 = disable NOTE: When attempting to arm the system, the keypad beeps once after the
1 = enable button is pressed if any faulted zones are present. The user should then
press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and arm
the system.
17600 Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification

0 = disable
If enabled, zone 5 is used for 2-way audio (AAV).
1 = enable NOTE: Zone 5 cannot be used as protection zone.
17700 Event Log Types

0 = disable
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Check, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test. If enabled, the system logs those events into the event log.
1 = enable NOTE: Events are also logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.
17710 12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format

0 = 12-hour
Select the type of time stamping for the event log.
1 = 24-hour
17720 Event Log Printer On-Line Mode

0 = disable
If enabled, the system prints the events as they occur.
If disabled, the system prints the log only upon request.
1 = enable
17730 Printer Baud Rate

0 = 1200
Select the baud rate for the serial printer.
NOTE: Must be 1 if using the alpha numeric pager interface.
1 = 300
17740 Relay Timeout XXX Minutes

Enter 000-127 times 2 minutes (000-254).
This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers
“04/09” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming output
command “56.”
17750 Relay Timeout YYY Seconds

Enter 000-127 seconds.
This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command numbers
“05/10” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming
command “57.”
17760 Access Control Relay (partition- If enabled, the assigned relay closes for 2 seconds when the user enters his
code and presses 0.
specific)
01-96 = relay number Must be 00 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
00 = relay not used. NOTE: See SECTION 3: Installing the Control for enhanced access control
capabilities.
17770 Log First Maintenance Signal

0 = disable
If enabled, the system logs the first maintenance signal from each smoke
detector. If disabled, no logging occurs.
1 = enable
27000 Number of Partitions

Enter 1-8.
Enter the number of partitions used in the system.
27010 Daylight Saving Time Start/End Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight saving time starts and ends.
Enter 00, 00 if daylight saving time does not apply to the user’s region.
Month
0 = disable Standard setting for U.S. is 04,10.
1 = enable
27020 Daylight Saving Time Start/End Enter the start and end weekends for daylight saving time as follows: 1=first;
2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last.
Weekend
Standard setting for U.S. is 1,5.
0 = disable
1 = enable
UL Fields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.
5-11
27050 Auto-Arm Delay (partition- This is the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto-
arm warning time (field 2*06).
specific)
00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto arming.
27060 Auto-Arm Warning Period This is the time that the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to
exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.
01-15 times 1-minute warning.
00 = no warning period.
27070 Auto-Disarm Delay (partition- This is the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto
disarming of the system.
specific)
00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto disarming.
27080 Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm If enabled, the system automatically bypasses any faulted zones when it
attempts to auto-arm.
0 = disable If disabled, the system will not auto-arm.
1 = enable
27090 Open/Close Reports by If enabled, Open/Close reports are sent only if the openings/closings occur
outside the arm and disarm windows.
Exception (partition-specific)
0 = disable NOTES:
1 = enable Open reports are also suppressed during the closing window in order to
prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then re-enters the premises,
for example to retrieve a forgotten item.
Openings and closings are still recorded in the event log.
This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be
sent.
27100 Allow Disarming Only During If enabled, disarming of the system is allowed only during the
arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1).
Arm/Disarm Windows (partition-
NOTE: This applies only to Operator-level users. Installer, Master, and
specific) Manager-level users can disarm the system at any time.
0 = disable
1 = enable
27110 Allow Disarm Outside Window if If enabled, allows the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm
(opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Otherwise disarming is allowed
Alarm Occurs
only during the disarm window.
0 = disable
1 = enable NOTE: Used only if field 2*10 is enabled.
27180 Enable GOTO for this Partition If enabled, this partition can be accessed from another partition’s keypad
using the GOTO command.
0 = disable
1 = enable
27190 Use Partition Descriptor

0 = disable
If enabled, the normal keypad display will include a partition number and four-
digit descriptor.
1 = enable
27200 Enable J2 Triggers for Partition If enabled, the J2 triggers function for this partition.
0 = disable
1 = enable
5-12
27210 Supervision Pulses for LRR

0 = disable
There are three entries in this field as follows: Fire, Burglary/Audible Panic,
Silent Panic/Duress.
1 = enable If enabled, causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J2 radio
triggers to the LRR. The LRR uses these pulses to determine that its
connection to the control is still intact.
27220 Display Fire Alarms of Other If enabled, allows fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at
this partition’s keypad(s).
Partitions (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
27230 Display Burglary & Panic Alarms If enabled, allows burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to
be displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).
for Other Partitions (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
27240 Display Troubles of Other If enabled, allows troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this
partition’s keypad(s).
Partitions (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
37000 Check or TRBL Display

0 = CHECK
Select whether the system should display CHECK or TRBL when a trouble
condition occurs.
1 = TRBL
If enabled, the system locks the display on the first fire alarm. Press ✳ to
37010 Fire Display Lock
0 = disable display the next fire alarm in the system. If disabled, the system scrolls all
1 = enable alarms automatically.
If enabled, use the delay time programmed in field 3✳16.

37120 Zone Type 18 Delay Use
0 = disable
1 = enable
37130 Supervisory on Open and Short

0 = disable
If enabled, the system produces a supervisory response on an open or short
circuit. If disabled, a short circuit produces a supervisory response and an
1 = enable open produces a trouble response.
37140 Waterflow Alarm Silence Option

0 = silenced by User Code + OFF
Select how the Waterflow zone type will be silenced.
NOTE: This feature may be set to 1 only by permission of the local authority.
1 = silenced when zone restores
37150 Alarm Sounds Bell 1 & 2

0 = pulsing
This field has two entries, one for each Notification Appliance Circuits. If set
for pulsing, field ✳08 applies.
1 = steady
37160 Zone Types 17 & 18 Delay

Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds
Select the delay time for zone types 17 and 18. The zone must be faulted for
entire delay time before an alarm or supervisory condition occurs. This may
Enter 00 for no delay prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow.
37170 Zone 6 Alternate Function Enable

0 = disable
If enabled, zone 6 may be used as a tamper zone (bell and cabinet tampers).
1 = enable
5-13
This option allows the delay programmed in field 3✳16 for Waterflow and
37180 Extended Delay for Zone Types
Supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times.
17 & 18
0 = no extended delay
1 = multiply delay by 4
For Waterflow alarms, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 90 seconds.
UL For Fire Supervisory signals, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 200 seconds.
37190 Auxiliary Input Alternate If enabled, pins 5 and 9 on the J2 connector function as Printer RXD and
DTR, respectively. If disabled, they function as fire alarm trigger and LRR Xmit
Function Enable
Okay. See the chart at field 3*20 for the J2 trigger configurations.
0 = disable
1 = enable NOTE: If field 3*19 is enabled, you cannot use a LRR connected to the J2 trigger.
37200 Trigger Outputs Function Select the function of the J2 trigger outputs. See chart below.
Selection
0 = remote keypad sounder
1 = keyswitch LEDs
Field 3*19 = 0 Field 3*19 = 0

J2 Pin Field 3*19 = 1
Field3*20 = 0 Field3*20 = 1
1 Panic Alarm Panic Alarm As selected in field 3*20
2 Trouble Trouble As selected in field 3*20
3 Burglary Alarm Burglary Alarm As selected in field 3*20
4 Fire Supervisory Fire Supervisory As selected in field 3*20
5 Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Printer RXD
6 Remote Console Sounder Keyswitch Ready LED As selected in field 3*20
7 Open/Close Keyswitch Armed LED As selected in field 3*20
8 Ground Ground Ground
9 LRR Xmit Okay LRR Xmit Okay Printer DTR
37210 Maximum Number of Dialer Select the maximum number of dialer attempts for the system.
Attempts NOTE: Must be 3, 4, or 5 for NFPA 72 compliant systems if a secondary
Enter the number of dialing attempts 1-8. phone number is programmed.
37300 Dialer Selection

0 = disable
This field has two entries, one for each dialer (main and backup). Enter 1 if the
dialer is being used.
1 = enable
37310 Backup Dialer TouchTone or Select the dialing method for the backup dialer.
Rotary
0 = rotary
1 = touchtone
37500 Zone Type Restore Enables for This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types that
will send Restore reports.
Types 16-18
0 = disable Must be 1 for UL commercial fire and burglary installations.
1 = enable
37550 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 1

0 = disable
If enabled, the system resets bell 1 output when the second User Code +
OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 1
1 = enable output after the first User Code + OFF.
37560 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 2

0 = disable
If enabled, the system resets bell 2 output when the second User Code +
OFF Code is entered after a fire alarm. If disabled, the system resets bell 2
1 = enable output after the first User Code + OFF.
5-14
37570 Confirmation of Arming Ding Bell This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If
enabled, produces ½-second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end of
2 & Auxiliary Relay
exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports).
0 = disable
1 = enable Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations.
37590 Enable Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay. If
enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the output.
Chime Annunciation
0 = disable
1 = enable
37600 Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Timeout

Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.
This field has two entries, one for bell 2 and one for the auxiliary relay.
Defines the length of time the output and the keypad’s sounder will sound for
00 = no timeout. all audible alarms.
Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations
and a minimum 6 minutes for UL commercial fire installations.
37610 Auxiliary Relay Function Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay.
NOTES:
Selection
0 = trouble/supervisory Smoke detector reset triggers the relay momentarily (approximately 6
1 = alarm, silenced by User Code + OFF seconds) on the second User Code + OFF entry.
2 = smoke detector reset Battery save is used to disconnect power from non-critical loads 4 hours after
3 = battery save AC loss.
4 = alarm, silenced by User Code + # + 67
37820 Burglary Features on Partition 1 If enabled, arming, test and chime modes can be used on partition 1.
NOTE: These features are automatically enabled on all other partitions.
Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
37850 System Zone Bypass Inhibit

0 = prevent bypass
Select which codes, if any, can bypass fire zones and systems zones.
NOTES:
1 = allow only installer to bypass This applies to fire zones programmed with zone types 9, 16, 17, and 18 and
2 = allow only installer and master codes to system zones 970-977.
bypass The bypassing can only be done from partition 1.
5-15
5-16
S E C T I O N 6
Scheduling Options
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.
UL • Auto-disarming is not permitted in UL installations.
General Force Arm

The scheduling features allow certain operations to be The Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to
automated, such as arming, disarming, bypassing of bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming (panel
zones, and activating relay outputs. performs a force-arm). This option is set in partition-
The system uses time windows (a programmed period of specific program field 2*08.
time with a start and stop time) for defining open/close Extend Closing Window
schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time
schedules, and access schedules for users. window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a
Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly keypad command, (User Code + #82), which prompts
menu modes of programming (#80, #81, #83, and #93 the user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2.
modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus This feature is useful if a user must stay on the
take you step by step through the options. premises later than usual.
Auto Arming The Auto-Arm delay and warning periods begin at the
The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a end of the extension.
partition at the end of a pre-determined closing Auto Disarming
(arming) time window.
The system can automatically disarm a partition at the
Auto Arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the end of a pre-determined opening (disarm) time window.
Auto-Arm Delay, the Auto-Arm Warning, or by
The disarming time can be delayed by using the Auto-
manually extending the closing (arming) time window
Disarm Delay feature.
with a keypad command.
The system can also automatically bypass any open Disarm Delay
zones when auto arming. Auto-Disarm Delay provides a delay before auto
disarming. This delay is added to the end of the disarm
Auto-Arm Delay
time window.
Auto-Arm Delay provides a delay (grace period) before
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56
auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing time
minutes, in partition-specific program field 2*07.
window.
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56 Restrict Disarming
minutes in partition-specific program field 2*05. At the This option allows disarming by users only during the
expiration of this delay, the Auto-Arm Warning will disarm time window and during the arming time
start. window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after
manually arming the partition).
Auto-Arm Warning
This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10. If field
The Auto-Arm Warning causes the keypad sounder to
2*10 is set, we highly recommend setting field 2*11, as
warn the user of an impending Auto-Arm.
well. This field allows the partition to be disarmed
The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the
the arming in partition-specific program field 2*06. partition is in alarm.
During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds
and displays “AUTO ARM ALERT.” During the last 60
seconds, the keypads beep every 5 seconds.
The panel arms at the conclusion of the Auto-Arm
Warning period.
6-1
Exception Reports Time-Driven Events
This option allows the reporting of openings and The system can automatically activate and de-activate
closings to the central station only if the arming and relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other
disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening devices on and off.
and closing time windows. It is set in partition-specific The Time-Driven events can be activated at different
field 2*09. times in relation to a time window:
The system can be programmed to send Failed to Open • At the beginning of a time window
and Failed to Close reports if the partition is not armed • At the end of a time window
or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time
window. • During a time window (on at beginning of window,
off at end)
Limitation of Access of Users by Time • At both the beginning and end of the time window
A user’s access to the system can be limited to a certain (e.g., to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a
time period. Outside this time, that user’s code is coffee break)
inactive. The system provides up to 8 access schedules, The system can perform the same actions on a daily
each consisting of two time windows (typically one for basis, or can perform an action only once (e.g., turn on
opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 PM).
two time windows for holidays.
The system also provides up to 20 programmable
The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu “timers” available to the end user for the purpose of
Mode, and enabled when a user’s access code is added activating output devices at preset times and days.
to the system.
If a user tries to operate the system outside the
schedule, the alpha keypad displays “Access Denied.”
Time Window Definitions

Scheduled events are based on time windows, (periods The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are
of time) during which an event may take place. The used when programming the various schedules
system supports up to 20 time windows, each defined by (open/close, limitation of access), as well as for Time-
a “Start” time and a “Stop” time. Driven event control.
Scheduling Example For this schedule, the four time windows need to be
programmed:
A store that has the following hours:
Window Start Stop Purpose
Monday to Friday 9am to 6pm
1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window
Saturday 10am to 4pm
2 9am 10am Saturday open window
Sunday Closed
3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window
Holidays Closed
4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Fri. close window
The owner desires the following time windows to allow
time for employees to arm or disarm the system: Using the #80 Menu Mode, the installer can program
Monday to Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am open/close schedules by assigning a time window to a
day of the week (windows are entered as 2-digit entries)
Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol
Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am
Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl
Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00
Sunday & Holidays Closed
NOTE: 00 is entered for those days on which the store
is closed.
Employees can arm and disarm the system, when
programmed, within the open and close time windows
without causing a report to be sent to the central
station (reporting by exception, field 2*09). The system
can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in
case an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-
arm/auto-disarm).
6-2
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
Open/Close Schedules Definitions

General Additional Schedules
The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three Additional opening and closing schedules can be
schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window programmed using the Time-Driven Event
for openings and one time window for closings. Programming. For example, a schedule for normal
There are three types of schedules available: Daily, store openings/closings can be programmed with a daily
Holiday, and Temporary. open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for
a lunch hour can be programmed using the Time-
Daily Schedule Driven event schedule programming.
Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for
one opening window and one closing window per day. detailed information.
Holiday Schedule Open/Close Reports by Exception
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily schedule The system can help reduce communication traffic to
on selected holidays throughout the year. the central station by using the Open/Close Reports by
The opening and closing windows are programmed in Exception feature. The Open/Close by Exception option
the daily schedule, but the holidays themselves are suppresses these reports from being sent to the central
defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80 station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected
Menu Mode. time window. Reports are only sent if the arm or
Temporary Schedule disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.
The temporary schedule provides a method for the end The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in
user to override the daily and holiday schedules. It its event log.
consists of one opening window and one closing window If a disarming occurs during a closing window (for
for each day of the week. The schedule takes effect for example, a person who arms the system forgets
up to one week, after which it is automatically something and has to re-enter), the Opening report
deactivated. (although outside of the opening window) will not be
This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the
Schedule Menu Mode. closing window).
This option is programmed in partition-specific program
field 2*09.
Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling

The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.
6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM
Early Opening reports are Auto-disarm delay begins. Auto-arm delay begins.
Opening Window Closing Window
sent if system is manually Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if Auto-arm warning begins.
disarmed before opening No reports are sent if auto-disarm is enabled). No reports are sent Auto-arm occurs after
window begins. system is disarmed if system is armed*
Missed Opening reports are sent warning expires (if auto-
Early and Late Opening during this time if manual disarming has not during this time arm is enabled).
and Closing reports are window. occurred at expiration of opening window.
Missed Closing reports are
programmable options If an arming occurs, window. * or disarmed if sent if manual arming has
in Report Code a Closing report is user needs to re-
Late Opening reports are sent if not occurred at expiration
Programming in the sent to the central enter premises.
disarm occurs after the opening of closing window.
Programming Guide. station regardless of window expires. Late Closing reports are
They are not dependent how the Exception
on the programming of Reporting option is Early Closing reports are sent if sent if system is manually
the Exception set. manual arming occurs before the armed after the closing
Reporting option. closing window begins. window expires.
Missed Opening/Closing type
reports are programmed in
Report Code Programming in
the Programming Guide. The
Exception Reporting option
must be set for these to be
sent.
6-3
Scheduling Menu Mode

The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program Steps to Program Scheduling Options
most of the scheduling and timed-event options. Enter
User Code + [#] + [8] + [0] from the normal operating
This section contains examples of the
mode. NOTE: Only users with an Installer or Master
worksheets only. For complete worksheets,
level user code may enter the #80 mode.
see the Programming Guide accompanying this
The following can be programmed while in this mode: Installation and Setup Guide.
• time windows
• open/close schedules to each partition In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the
• holiday schedules worksheets to do the following:
• Time-Driven events (for system functions and relay 1. Define time windows (up to 20)
activation) 2. Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule
• limitation of access schedules per day, per partition)
Some scheduling features are programmed in Data 3. Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to
Field Programming Mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 0). 16)
Some features are programmed in the #93 Menu Mode. 4. Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)
The programming scheduling fields are listed below. 5. Define the Time-Driven events (up to 20)
System-Wide Fields: NOTE: Temporary schedules are programmed using
*04 Enable Random Timers #81 Menu Mode.
1*74 –1*75 Relay timeout values Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the
following functions:
2*01-2*02 Daylight saving time options
6. Program the time windows
Allow disarming outside window if alarm
2*11 7. Program the open/close schedules
occurs
8. Program the Time-Driven events
Partition-Specific fields:
9. Program the access schedules
1*76 Access control relay for this partition
2*05 Auto-arm delay value Scheduling Menu Structure
2*06 Auto-arm warning time
To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:
User Code + [#] + [80]. (Installer or Master level user
2*07 Auto-disarm delay value
code.)
2*08 Force-arm enable
2*09 Open/Close Reporting by Exception
2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows Scheduling Program Mode can be entered only
when all partitions are disarmed.
#93 Menu Mode (System Group #3)
Scheduling related report codes
Event-driven options are programmed using Output
Programming in #93 Menu Mode. Relay activation can
also be Time-Driven and that those are programmed
using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-Driven
Event Programming later in this section for the
procedure.
There are 6 procedures of scheduling menus accessed via #80, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main menu
prompt selects that menu procedure. Prompts for programming that scheduling feature then appear. Enter 0 to skip a
procedure and display the next menu option.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Time Window ? Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt appears. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to Time
Windows Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.
O/C Schedules ? Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to Open/Close Schedules Programming later in
this section for detailed procedures.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.
6-4
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Holidays ? Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to Holiday Schedule Programming later in this section for
detailed procedures.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.
Timed Events ? Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional schedules, and other system functions. Refer
to Time-Driven Event Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.
Access Sched. ? Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to Limitation of Access Schedules Programming later in this
section for detailed procedures.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 to move to the “Quit?” prompt.
Quit ? Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to normal operating mode.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0 Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options. If you press 0, the “Time
Window?” prompt is displayed.
Time Windows
The system provides 20 time windows that are defined Time Window Start Time Stop Time
with start and stop times. These windows are used for Number (HH:MM) (HH:MM)
various open/close and access schedules, as well as for
output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling 1
system. These windows are shared among all 8 2
partitions. 3…..20
Time Windows Worksheet
A time window must have a start and a stop time.
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
found in the Programming Guide. This worksheet will Time Windows Programming
help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code +
this system before you program them. Note that time [#] + [80]. The keypad displays the Time Window
windows can span midnight; for example, from 11 PM Programming prompt.
to 1 AM.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Time Window ? Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Time Window # ? Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be programmed.
01-20, 00 = Quit 01 Press [✳] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Time Window #?” prompt to quit time window
programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 TIME WINDOW If you entered a time window number, the cursor is now positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of
window entry.
00:00AM 00:00AM
Enter the desired start of window hour and press [✳]. The cursor moves to the minutes position. Enter the
desired minutes and press [✳]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is
under the A/P position and then press [✳]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.
When the entry is completed, the “Time Window #?” prompt is displayed again.
Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.
Quit ? Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0 Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Because the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing a
time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.
6-5
Daily Open/Close Schedules

Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close Open/Close Schedule Worksheet
schedule, plus a holiday schedule. Temporary
schedules are programmed separately, using the #81 The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program found in the Programming Guide. Write the previously
additional open/close schedules, see Time-Driven Events defined time window numbers for open and close for
Programming later in this section for the procedure. each partition.
Part Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl
1
2
3…8
Open/Close Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
O/C Schedules ? Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Partition # ? Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following open/close schedules will apply.
01-08, 00 = Quit 01 Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Partition #?” prompt to quit open/close schedules programming and display the “Quit
?” prompt.
Mon P1 OP WIND.? Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day’s opening schedule beginning with Monday.
00:00 00:00 00 Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has
been stored for that window number is displayed as a programming aid.
Press [✳] to accept the entry.
Mon P1 CL WIND.? Enter the time window number for the displayed day’s closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window number is displayed.
00:00 00:00 00
Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.
Tue P1 OP WIND.? The keypad now prompts for Tuesday’s open/close schedule. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.
00:00 00:00 00 When the last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday opening and closing window prompts are
displayed.
Hol P1 OP WIND.? Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time windows.
00:00 00:00 00 Press the [✳] key to accept the entry.
When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for
each partition in the system.
Quit ? Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Holiday Schedules
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year.
The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can be assigned to any
combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for
which these holidays apply.
6-6
Holiday Schedule Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet found in the Programming Guide.
HOL Partition
Month/Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 /
2 /
3…16
Holiday Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Holidays ? Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.

1 = YES 0 = NO 0
HOLIDAY NUMBER ? Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed and press [✳] to accept entry.
01-16,00=Quit 01 Enter 00 + [✳] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ENTER DATE The cursor is now positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press [✳] to
proceed to the day field.
00/00
Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.
Press [✳] to accept the entry.
Part ? 12345678 Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press [0] to turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to
toggle the letter “x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.
Hit 0-8 x x
Press the [✳] key when all desired partitions have been assigned.
The “Holiday Number?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be
programmed.
Time-Driven Events
These schedules are used to activate outputs, bypass Time-Driven Events Worksheet
zones, etc. based on time. There are 20 of these
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet
schedules that may be programmed for the system,
found in the Programming Guide. Fill out the
each governed by the previously defined time windows.
worksheet using the steps outlined below.
The actions that can be programmed to automatically
activate at set times are: relay commands, arm/disarm
commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close
access conditions.
Sched Time Days Action Action Activation

Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time
1
2
3…20
1. Enter the schedule number (01-20) and time

window number (01-20), and note the day of the
week the action is desired.
6-7
2. Enter the code for the desired action and Open/Close Windows
action specifier. The action codes represent the
events that are to take place when the scheduled Action Code Action Action Specifier
time is reached. Each action also requires an 40
Enable Opening Window by
Partition(s)
action specifier, which defines what the action will partition
affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user Enable Closing Window by
41 Partition(s)
group). The action specifier varies, depending on partition
the type of action selected. Enable Access Window for
42 Access Group
access group
The following is a list of the Action Codes (desired
actions) used when programming Time-Driven 50 Off-Normal Reminder None
events. Note that these codes are independent of (starts local keypad beeping if
the relay codes programmed during Output fire or system trouble
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. condition exists)
Relay Commands Access Control Commands

Action Code Action Action Specifier Action Code Action Action Specifier
01 Relay On Relay # 55 Access Point Grant Access Point #
02 Relay Off Relay # Access Point Grant with
56 Access Point #
Override
03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay #
57 Access Point Protect Access Point #
Relay Close XX minutes (set
04 Relay # 58 Access Point Bypass Access Point #
in field 1*74)
Relay Close YY seconds (set 59 Access Point Lock Access Point #
05 Relay #
in field 1*75) 60 Access Point Exit Access Point #
06 Relay Group On Relay Group # 61 Access Point Group Grant Group #
07 Relay Group Off Relay Group # 62 Access Point Group Grant
Group #
Relay Group Close for 2 with Override
08 Relay Group #
seconds 63 Access Point Group Protect Group #
Relay Group Close XX 64 Access Point Group Bypass Group #
09 Relay Group #
minutes (set in field 1*74)
65 Access Point Group Lock Group #
Relay Group Close YY
10 Relay Group # 66 Access Point Group Exit Group #
seconds (set in field 1*75)
67 Access Point Partition Grant Partition #
Arm/Disarm Commands
68 Access Point Partition Grant
Action Code Action Action Specifier Partition #
with Override
20 Arm-STAY Partition(s) 69 Access Point Protect by
Partition #
21 Arm AWAY Partition(s) Partition
22 Disarm Partition(s) 70 Access Point Bypass by

Partition #
Partition
Force Arm STAY (Auto-
23 Partition(s) Access Point Lock by
bypass faulted zns) 71 Partition #
Partition
Force Arm AWAY (Auto-
24 Partition(s) 72 Access Point Exit by Partition Partition #
bypass faulted zns)
73 Access Point Trigger On Trigger #
• The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies 74 Access Point Trigger Off Trigger #
when using Time-Driven events to auto-arm. 77 Access Point Group Enable Group #
• Temporary schedules do not override an 78 Access Point Group Disable Group #
auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed
in Time-Driven events.
• The auto-arming window cannot be extended
using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.
Bypass Commands
Action Code Action Action Specifier
30 Auto bypass – Zone list Zone list #
31 Auto unbypass – Zone list Zone list #
6-8
3. Enter the desired activation time (when the Time-Driven Event Programming
action is to take place). Select from: The following menu items must first be programmed in
Activation Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:
Description
Time Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)
1 Beginning of time window. Output Group (if applicable)
2 End of time window. Restriction
3 During time window active period only (on at Output Type (V-Plex, 4204/4204CF, or FSA)
beginning of window, off at end). Zone No. (V-Plex)
For example, if bypass is selected to activate during ECP Address (4204/4204CF or FSA)
the window, zones in a zone list are bypassed at the
beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end Relay No. (4204/4204CF)
of the window. LED No. (FSA)
4 Beginning and end of time window (e.g., a coffee
break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is
selected, the relay pulses for 2 seconds at the
beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of
the coffee break. At the end of the window it pulses
again, signaling the end of coffee break.
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Timed Events ? Enter 1 to program timed events.

1 = YES 0 = NO 0
TIMED EVENT # ? Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).

01-20, 00=Quit 01 Press [✳].
The system then prompts the user to enter the desired action to be taken.
Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ACTION ? Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list at the left. This could be an output command,
an arming command, or any other Time-Driven event.
none 00
Press [✳] to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier appears.
ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER
01=Relay On Actions 01-05 01 RELAY # ?

02=Relay Off If you selected actions 01-05, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay 00
03=Relay Close for 2 seconds number.
04=Relay Close XX minutes Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
05=Relay Close YY seconds
06=Relay Group On Actions 06-10 01 RELAY GRP # ?

07=Relay Group Off If you selected actions 06-10, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay 00
08=Relay Group Close for 2 group number.
seconds
Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
09=Relay Group Close XX
minutes
10=Relay Group Close YY
seconds
20=Arm-STAY Actions 21-26 and 40-41 PART? 12345678

21=Arm AWAY If you selected actions 21-24 or 40-41, the prompt at the right appears. Enter HIT 0-8 X X
22=Disarm the partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter
23=Force Arm STAY a partition number again to deselect it.
24=Force Arm AWAY Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
40=Enable Open Window by
Part.
41=Enable Close Window by
Part.
6-9
ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER
30=Auto bypass – Zone list Actions 30-31 01 ZONE LIST ?

31=Auto unbypass – Zone list If you selected actions 30-31, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the zone ENTER 01-15 01
list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed.
42=Enable Access Window for Action 42 GROUP ? 12345678

Access group(s)
If you selected action 42, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the group HIT 0-8 X
number to which the time window will apply.
50=Off-Normal Reminder Action 50

No action specifier is required for this action since the condition that this
occurs for are system-wide.
55=Access Point Grant Actions 55-60 01 ACCESS POINT #

56=Access Point Grant If you selected actions 55-60, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
w/Override 000
access point number.
57=Access Point Protect
58=Access Point Bypass
59=Access Point Lock
60=Access Point Exit
61=Access Point Group Grant Actions 61-66 and 77-78 01 GROUP #

62=Access Point Group Grant If you selected actions 61-66, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
w/Override 00
group number.
63=Access Point Group
Protect
Bypass
65=Access Point Group Lock
66=Access Point Group Exit
Enable
Disable
67=Access Point Partition Actions 67-72 PART? 12345678

Grant
If you selected actions 67-72, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the HIT 0-8 X X
68=Access Point Partition partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter a
Grant w/Override
partition number again to deselect it.
69=Access Point Protect by
Partition Press [✳] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
70=Access Point Bypass by
Partition
71=Access Point Lock by
Partition
72=Access Point Exit by
Partition
73=Access Point Trigger On Actions 73-74 01 TRIGGER #

74=Access Point Trigger Off If actions 73-74 were selected, the prompt at the right will be displayed. Enter 00
the trigger number.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
01 Time Window ? Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the time window number is displayed.
00:00 00:00 01
Press [✳] to accept entry.
6-10
PROMPT EXPLANATION
01 Active time ? Enter the activation time from 1-10 (listed below). As the number is keyed in, the activation time is
displayed. The choices are:
0
1: Trigger at the start of the window.
2: Trigger at the end of the window.
3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.
4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window. Example: coffee break buzzer.
Days ? MTWTFSSH The system then asks for which days the event is to be activated.
Hit 0-8 x x Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday
= 1, Holiday = H = 8).
When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each timed event for the installation.
Quit ? Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit
Scheduling Menu Mode.
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Limitation of Access Schedules

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user’s access The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that
code is limited to working during a certain period of user is added to the system. If no limitations apply,
time. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of enter 0.
which consists of two time windows for each day of the
Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet
week and two time windows for holidays (typically, one
for an opening time window and the second for a closing Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each
time window). A user, required to follow a schedule, access schedule.
would be assigned to an access group of the same
number (e.g., schedule 1= group 1).
Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol

Sch W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2
1
2
3…8
NOTE: The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule.
Limitation of Access Schedules Programming
To program access schedules enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu
Mode, press [0] until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Access Sched. ? Enter 1 to program access schedules.

1 = YES 0 = NO 0
ACCESS SCHED # ? Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.
01-08, 00 = Quit 01 Press [✳] to accept entry.
Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.
MON A1 Window 1? Enter the first time-window number (01-20) for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is
keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
00:00 00:00 00
Press [✳] to continue.
6-11
PROMPT EXPLANATION
MON A1 Window 2 ? Enter the second time-window number from 01-20 for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the
number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
00:00 00:00 00
TUE A1 Window 1? Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the last day of the week has been programmed,
the windows for holidays may be entered.
00:00 00:00 00
Hol A1 Window 1 ? Enter the first time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
00:00 00:00 00 actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
Hol A1 Window 2 ? Enter the second time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
00:00 00:00 00
Temporary Schedules
Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule, A temporary schedule affects only the partition from
which overrides the regular open/close schedule (and which it is entered. Temporary schedules can also be
the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#])
soon as it is programmed, and remains active for up to to the “DAYS?” prompt and activating the appropriate
one week. days. This should be considered when defining daily
Only users with the authority level of manager or time windows.
higher can program temporary schedules.
Temporary Schedule Worksheet
Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 Disarm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
2…8 Disarm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
6-12
Temporary Schedules Programming

Enter User Code + [#] + 81 to enter this mode.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Mon DISARM WIND. This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm (opening) window for Monday.
00:00AM 00:00AM Upon entry of this mode, the cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm
window. Enter the desired hour.
Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. Press [✳] to move to
the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
Press [✳] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing) window for Monday. Pressing [#] scrolls you
through the prompts without making any changes.
Mon ARM WINDOW This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm (closing) window for Monday.
00:00AM 00:00AM The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window. Enter the hour.
Press [✳] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. Press [✳] to move to
the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
After the windows for that day have been completed, the system prompts for disarm and arm time windows
for the next day. Press [#] if no changes are desired.
Tue DISARM WIND. Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.
00:00AM 00:00AM When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the system prompts for which days of the
schedule are to be activated.
Days ? MTWTFSS This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule.
Hit 0-7 x x To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “X” appears under that day, indicating the
temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0
toggles all days on/off.
The temporary schedule is in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week
progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other entries for the temporary schedule
remain programmed.
Press [✳] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any
changes.
User Scheduling Menu Mode

The system provides up to 20 “timers” available to the end user to control output devices. The output devices themselves
are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. The end user
needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.
The installer may set certain outputs to be “restricted” during Output Programming (this prevents the end user from
controlling doors, pumps, Notification Appliance Circuits, etc.)
To enter this mode, the user enters User Code + [#] + 83.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Output Timer # ? Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press [✳] to accept entry and move to the next
prompt.
01-20, 00=Quit 01
Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.
06 07:00P 11:45P If that timer number has already been programmed, a summary screen appears. In this example:
PORCH LITE 04 06 = Timer #
07:00PM = Start Time
11:45PM = Stop Time
PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4
04 = Output Device # affected by this timer
6-13
PROMPT EXPLANATION
06 ENTER OUTPUT# Enter the desired output number (01-96). As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device is
displayed.
PORCH LITE 04
Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an output
descriptor of “None.” Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
06 ON TIME ? The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the ON time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move
to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by
07:00 PM
hitting any key from 0-9 while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
06 OFF TIME ? The cursor positioned on the tens of hours digit of the OFF time. Enter the desired hour. Press [✳] to move
11:45 PM to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by
hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
06 DAYS? MTWTFSS To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “x” appears under that day, indicating the
HIT 0-7 x x output for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0 toggles all
days on/off.
The outputs are in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses,
the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent option is selected (next screen
prompt).
When completed, press [✳] to continue.
06 Permanent ? Selecting “Permanent” (1) means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis. Selecting 0
means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter “x” under the day is then cleared, but
0 = NO,1 = YES 0
all other entries for the output device remain programmed.
The system quits User Scheduling Mode and returns to normal operating mode.
6-14
S E C T I O N 7
Downloading Primer
(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
Downloading allows the operator to remotely access, Access Security
program, and control the security system over normal The following four levels of protection guard the control
telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly against compromise while it is being accessed from a
from the keypad can be done remotely, using remote location:
ADEMCO’s COMPASS downloading software. To 1. Security code handshake: The subscriber’s account
communicate with the control panel, the following is number as well as an 8-digit ID number (known
required: only to the office) must be matched between the
1. IBM PC-compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with control and computer.
100 MB of available hard disk space and at least 2. Hang-up and callback: The control panel “hangs
8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X, up” and calls the computer back at the pre-
Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT. programmed number only if the security codes
2. One of the following modems: match.
• ADEMCO CIA 3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged
• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2 between the computer and control is encrypted to
or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher) reduce the possibility of anyone “tapping” the line
• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external and corrupting data.
• Hayes Optima 336 4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned
various levels of access to the downloader, each
• BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume
having its own log-on code. The access levels allow
• BizComp Intellimodem 2400 the operators read/write capabilities of the
Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to customers’ account information. For a detailed
be 100% compatible. explanation of the access levels, see the
3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software available on downloading software User Manual.
CD ROM with a complete User’s Manual. It may NOTES:
also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page. • Each time the control panel is accessed
The web address is http://www.ademco.com. successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent to
the central station, if Opening reports are
Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP programmed.
switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch • When the system is downloading, the keypad
will not work. displays “MODEM COMM.”
• After each download or save, an automatic time
stamp is done, to indicate the last download (or
save) and the operator ID number.
• A complete hard copy of each individual account
can be obtained by connecting a printer to the
computer. Refer to your computer Owner’s Manual
or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.
7-1
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

At the protected premises, the control panel must be To download a control without programming any
connected to the existing telephone line (refer to the information, perform the following steps:
SECTION 3: Installing the Control). No programming
of the panel is required before downloading to an initial Step Action
installation unless you are performing an unattended 1 Enter the Installer Code + [#] + [5]. The
download. panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5
When establishing a connection between the computer and sets the Download Callback option to “1”
and the control panel, the following occurs: (callback not required).
Stage What Happens 2 From the computer, call the panel using the
1 The computer calls up the control panel. downloader software set to “First
(The phone number for each customer must Communication” Mode.
be entered into the customer’s account file The downloader establishes a session with no
on the computer.) callback. The panel information can then be
downloaded.
2 The control panel answers the phone call at
the pre-programmed ring count and executes On-Line Control Functions
a handshake with the computer.
The following functions can be performed while on-line
3 The computer sends a request for callback to with a control panel (see field *37):
the control, unless callback is not required. • Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the
system
4 The panel acknowledges the request and • Bypass a zone
hangs up. During the next few seconds, the
• Force the system to accept a new program
control processes the request, making sure
download
certain encrypted information received from
the computer matches its own memory. • Shut down communication (dialer) functions (for
nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned
5 Upon a successful match, the control panel system)
seizes the phone line and calls the computer • Shut down all security system functions (for
back, unless callback is not required. (The nonpayment for a leased system)
phone number to which the computer’s • Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents
modem is connected must be programmed takeover of your accounts)
into the control field ✳35.)
• Leave a message for customer
6 The computer answers, usually by the NOTE: Messages sent to the control panel from the
second ring, and executes a handshake with downloader will be viewable at ALL partitions.
the panel.
• Command the system to upload a copy of its
7 The panel then sends other default resident program to the office
information to the computer. If this • Read: arming status, AC power status, list of
information matches the computer’s faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 1024 event
information, a successful link is established. log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones
The system is now “on-line” with the currently in trouble, and ECP equipment list
computer. • Set the real-time clock
• Alarms and Trouble responses and reports

are disabled during actual uploading or
downloading sessions. If you are on-line,
but not actively uploading or downloading,
all alarms report immediately. All other
reports are delayed until you complete the
session.
• The keypads remain active when on-line
with a control, but are inactive during
actual uploading or downloading sessions.
7-2
Section 24 - Downloading Primer
Direct-Wire Downloading
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB can be downloaded Connector J2 on the main PC board (see the Summary
without using a modem or telephone line by using a of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this
4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading manual) is intended to be interfaced to either a local
Software. The direct-wire downloading connection is to serial printer (see Event Log Connections in SECTION
be temporary, and is not part of the permanent 3 Installing the Control) or a computer. Make
installation. Direct-wire downloading is meant as a tool connections to a computer as shown below. Note that
for the installer during the installation process. the violet wire connection for a computer differs
from that used when connecting a serial printer.
The connections between the control and
the 4100SM are different than those shown
in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See Remove the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module, if it
Figure 7-1 for the correct connections. In is installed, before performing the direct-wire
addition, in place of the green wire, referred to download. It may be reconnected once the
in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY” direct-wire download is completed.
section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the
violet wire instead.
Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections
Telco Handoff
Telco handoff is another method of getting on-line with the downloader. The installer or customer enters the User Code
+ [#] + [1], while on the phone line with the computer’s modem phone line. The customer will get cut-off and the panel
and download computer will establish a connection.
7-3
7-4
S E C T I O N 8
Setting the Real-Time Clock

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
This system provides a real-time clock, which must be
set in order for the system’s event log to keep track of Use a 6139/6160 alpha keypad to set the real-
events by time and date. It must also be set in order to time clock, or set the clock via the downloader
execute scheduling programs (Time-Driven events). If software. Only users with Installer or Master
you are using Panel Linking, you can set the Real-Time authority level can set the clock.
clock at one panel and have the system automatically
update the time and date at the other control panels.
Setting the Time and Date

To set the real time clock, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Installer or Master Code + [#] 63.
Typical display shows:
TIME/DATE –– THU
12:01 AM 01/01/90
The day of the week is automatically
calculated based on the date entered. Time
and date entries are made by simply entering
the appropriate hour, minute, month, day
and year.
Press [✳] to move the cursor to the right of
the display, to the next position.
Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the
display, to the previous position.
2 Enter the correct hour. Then press [✳] to
move to the “minutes” field.
3 Enter the correct minutes. Press [✳] to move
to the AM/PM position.
4 Press any key 0-9 to change AM to PM, or PM
to AM. Press [✳] to move cursor to the
“month” field position.
5 Enter the correct month using a 2-digit entry.
Press [✳] to move cursor to the “day” field
position.
6 Enter the correct day using a 2-digit entry.
Press [✳] to move cursor to the “year” field
position.
7 Enter the correct year.
Press [✳] to exit the real-time clock edit
mode.
8-1
8-2
S E C T I O N 9
User Access Codes

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
General Information
The VISTA-32FB system allows a total of 75 security
access codes to be allocated. The VISTA-128FB allows a
A user code other than the installer code must
total of 150 security access codes to be allocated. Each be programmed in order for the Quick Arm
security access code is identified by a user ID number. feature to function.
Regardless of the number of partitions each code
has access to, it occupies only one user slot in the
system. If a particular code is not used in all
partitions, that user ID number cannot be used
again.
The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed
(partition-specific program field *29). The Quick Arm
feature allows the user to arm the system by pressing
the [#] key instead of the security code. The security
code must always be entered to disarm the system.
User Codes & Levels of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of Use the “View Capabilities” keypad function (User
authority, which authorizes the user for certain system Code + [✳] + [✳]) to view the partitions and authority
functions. A user can have different levels of authority levels for which a particular user is authorized. These
within different partitions levels are described below.
Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code

Level 2: Manager Codes
• Programmed in field *00 (default = 5-1-4-0).
• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
Installer Open/Close reporting selected in field *39.
bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.
• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
• May add, delete, or change other users of the
bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if armed by
system below this level (Manager cannot assign
another code (or by Quick Arm).
anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).
• Can add, delete, or change all other codes, and can
• May change his own code.
select Open/Close reports for any user.
• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as
• Is the only code that can be used to enter program
that of the Manager who is adding the new user.
mode. The Installer Code can be prevented from re-
entering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98. Levels 3-5: Operator Codes
• Must program at least one Master Code during • Can operate a partition, but cannot add or modify
initial installation. Master Codes are codes any user code (see table below).
intended for use by the primary user(s) of the
system. Level Title Functions Permitted
3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass
Level 1: Master Codes
4 Operator B Arm, Disarm
• Can perform all normal system functions.
• Can be used to assign up to 148 lower-level codes, 5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with
which can be used by other users of the system. same code
• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1. • Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter
• May change his own code. Code) cannot disarm the system unless the system
• Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator was armed with that code. This code is usually
Codes. Each user’s code can be individually assigned to persons who may need to arm and
eliminated or changed at any time. disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a
• Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as babysitter needs to control the system only when
that of the Master who is adding the new user. babysitting).
9-1
Level 6: Duress Codes Duress Reporting NOTE: A non-zero report
• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station code for zone 992 (duress) must be
if the user is being forced to disarm (or arm) the programmed, and partition-specific field *85
system under threat (system must be connected to duress location enabled, to enable Duress
a central station). reporting.
• When the system’s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are • The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the
connected to another communication’s media th
5 key depression (such as OFF), not the 4 key
th
(Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that depression (last digit of code). Duress reports are
duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals th
not triggered if the 5 key is a [*], such as when you
silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique perform a GOTO or view the capabilities of a user.
report when digitally communicated).
• Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can
be any code or codes desired.
General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes Open/Close Reporting Note: When a user is added,
the system prompts for Open/Close reporting capability
The following rules apply to users when making modifications
within the system based on the user code authority levels:
only if the installer is adding the new user. When a
Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user’s
• Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used
interchangeably when performing system functions within a Open/Close reporting is the same as that of the Master
partition (a system armed with a user’s temporary code can or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close
be disarmed with the Master Code or another user’s reports are required to be selectable by the Master or
temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or
described above. Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting
• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME enabled, and one without.
or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned.
Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled
• A user (levels 0, 1 and 2 only) may only ADD users to a if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close reporting, and
LOWER authority level.
that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick
• A user may assign other users access to only those Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User 002 must
partitions to which he himself has access.
have authority and Open/Close must be enabled for all
• A user code can be DELETED or CHANGED only from
partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not
within the partition it was created in.
desired, it is suggested that user 002 be assigned
• User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user
authority level 5 in all partitions, and that the code be
numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a “00”
(e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system
understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered unless armed by that user.
as 4-digit numbers.
ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of
reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other
report format is used, only user numbers 001 –
015 can uniquely report to the central station.
Users 016 – 150 will report as User 015.
Multiple Partition Access

Each user is programmed for a primary (home) The control automatically assigns him the same user
partition. A user can also be given access to operate number within Partition 2.
one or more additional partitions. Within each EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS
partition, each user may be programmed to have
Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8
different levels of authority. For example, User 003,
the VP of Engineering, could be assigned to work within User 3 User 3
the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC Level 1 Level 4
Manufacturing. Because he needs the full capabilities Master Oper B
in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1
authority. In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in
Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2.
He must also be able to gain access to the
His user number is the same for both partitions. Note
manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency
basis. You can set this up easily by requesting that he that if a user number is already being used in a
partition, the system will automatically assign a new
also be assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority
user an unused number. Also notice that no access is
set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B).
allowed for this user into Partitions 3 – 8. Attempts to
access these partitions would be denied automatically.
9-2
Section 9 – User Access Codes
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) During user code entry, normal key
+ new user’s code depressions at other keypads in a partition are
ignored. However, panic key depression
†Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a
causes an alarm and terminates user entry.
higher level of authority than the code being changed
(e.g., a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, NOTE: All references to the number of user codes
but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code). pertain to the VISTA-128FB. The VISTA-32FB allows
Keypad prompts for the authority level for this user. only 75 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
User Number = 003 Enter the level number as follows:

Enter Auth. Level 1 = Master
2 = Manager
3 = Operator Level A
4 = Operator Level B
5 = Operator Level C
6 = Duress
Keypad then prompts for Open/Close reporting option for this user.
Open/Close Rep.? Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not arming/disarming by this user will trigger Opening
and Closing reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a user.
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Group Bypassing? Enter 1 (YES) to allow this user to perform group bypasses. Enter 0 (NO) this user will not be able to perform
group bypasses.
0 = NO , 1 = YES
NOTE: In addition to enabling the user for group bypassing, the user must also have access to the
partition(s) containing the zones being bypassed and have global arming capability.
Access Group? If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears. Enter the user’s access group number (1-
8) if this user should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access group should be assigned.
Enter 0-8
RF Button ? If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to
a user, this prompt appears. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
0=NO , 1=YES
Enter Button ZN # If you answered “yes” to the RF button question, the zone number for the button is requested. Enter any
one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY, or DISARM. The system then
(001-087)
assigns all buttons of the transmitter to this user number.
Multi-Access ? Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have access
to more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad prompts for the Global
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Arm option for this user.
Global Arm ? Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition via
Global Arm prompts (described in the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB User Guide).
0 = NO , 1 = YES
The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.
Part. 2 – SHOP ? Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed partition number.
If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in sequence.
0 = NO , 1 = YES
If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:
• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority Level prompt above).
• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see Open/Close prompt above).
• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.
When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which access has
been assigned, and will display the user number, authority level, open/close and global arm options that
were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted access. For example:
Part. 1 A0* WHSE Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in
the displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the second line indicates Open/Close reporting is
User 003 Auth=3G.
enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The “T” indicates the partition from which the user may be
changed or deleted.
9-3
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter Installer Code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + new user’s code
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-32FB allows only 75 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
User Number = 003 The system detects that the user number is already assigned, and prompts if this is a new user.
NEW USER? Press 0 (NO).
The system then confirms that the change is allowed based on authorization level.
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User

To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user’s global arm option, first delete that user’s code, then re-add
the user code as described in the “Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code” paragraph.
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter your code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + your code again
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-32FB allows only 75 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
OK TO DELETE 003? The system prompts to confirm that you want to delete this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
0=NO 1=YES If you answered “yes,” that user’s code is removed from all partitions to which it was assigned,
and all authorization levels and other information about that user are deleted. Note that a user
can be deleted only by a user with a higher authority level. A user cannot delete himself.
A user code can be deleted only from the partition through which it was entered. If an attempt is made to
delete from another partition, the message “User [XXX] Not Deleted” is displayed.
Exiting the User Edit Mode

Press either [7] or [#], or don’t press any key for 10 seconds.
9-4
S E C T I O N 1 0
Testing the System

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Battery Test
When AC power is present, the VISTA-32FB/VISTA- If the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB finds that the battery
128FB runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to voltage is low (less than approximately 11.5V), it
determine if there is a battery connected, and runs an initiates a keypad “SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a
extended battery test every 4 hours to check on the rapid keypad beeping sound. It also sends a Low
battery’s condition. Battery report to the central station (if programmed).
The keypad is cleared by entering any security code +
OFF, and a Restore report is sent to the central station
if the situation has been corrected.
Dialer Test
The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB may be programmed to UL requires the test report to be transmitted at least
automatically transmit test reports to a central station once every 24 hours. The system can be programmed to
at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per send the first report at any time of the day, or on any
9999 hours (field ✳27). day of the week (field ✳83).
Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)

This test causes fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or Keypads display “FIRE DRILL ACTIVE” while the test
any NAC having a non-zero response type programmed) is active. The test is stopped by entering any user code
to be activated (in either steady or pulsing manner, as + OFF.
programmed in field 3✳15, for the purpose of The system continues to monitor all 24-hour type zones
conducting a fire drill or bell test. This test can only be (fire, panic, etc.) and ends the test if any of these zone
activated by the installer or master users from partition types produce an alarm condition.
1 keypads by entering the corresponding security code +
This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as
[#] + 69. The burglary portion of the system must be
determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.
disarmed.
One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)

This test causes the system to sound console beeps and This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as
Notification Appliance Circuit dings in response to fire determined by the local authority having jurisdiction.
zone faults (zone type 9, 16 & 17) for the purpose of
allowing proper zone operation to be checked without When testing non-latching devices, such as heat
triggering alarms. Note that the system will not be detectors, be sure to keep the device faulted
operational as an alarm system (i.e., cannot sense until the system responds with the keypad beep
alarms) while this test is active. The test can only be or siren sound. If the device is faulted only
activated by the installer by entering the Installer’s momentarily, the system may not respond to the
Code and pressing [#] + 68 while the burglary portion of fault.
the system is disarmed.
When this test is first activated, the system will display:
PROMPT EXPLANATION
USE BELL DING? Enter 1 (YES) to have the fire Notification Appliance Circuits associated with each point sound for 3 seconds
when a point is faulted.
0=NO 1=YES
Enter 0 (NO) if only keypad sounders are desired.
The next prompt will be displayed.
10-1
PROMPT EXPLANATION
AUTO-TEST DET? Enter 1 (YES) to have the system automatically test all polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16.
Other fire zones will have to be tested manually.
0=NO 1=YES
Enter 0 (NO) to test every point manually.
The next prompt will be displayed.
For true detector sensitivity tests, and for compliance with fire codes, you must enter 0 (NO) to this question.
LOG RESULTS? Enter 1 (YES) to have the system log each point as it is tested. A list of untested points will also be logged.
0=NO 1=YES Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to log the results.
The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report format has been selected.
C.S. TRANSMIT? Enter 1 (YES) to have the results of the test sent to the central station. This report will consist of a list of
points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested.
0=NO 1=YES
Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to report the results. A Walk-Test Start and Walk-Test End report will be
sent in either case (if programmed).
When the Test Mode is activated, the system will sound Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire
fire Notification Appliance Circuits (or any NAC having Notification Appliance Circuits to ding. The keypads
a non-zero response type programmed in the #93 Menu will display the zone number and the associated alpha
Mode) for 3 seconds. The system will also send a Start descriptor while the zone remains faulted. The system
of Walk-Test message to the central station, and will automatically issues a smoke detector power reset
light all keypad indicators (except the ARMED LED) about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these
and display window segments to verify that they are zones, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.
working properly. The keypads will then display Fire
Walk-Test in Progress and will sound a single beep
The system will automatically perform the
every 15 seconds while this test is active.
smoke detector reset on zones 1 & 2, if
The system will build a list of all the fire zones programmed for fire, and on the auxiliary relay
(response types 9, 16, 17, 18) that need to be tested. and any other output device (relay) that is
These points will be scrolled on the display. For each programmed for smoke detector reset.
point, the keypad will display "UNTST XXX," where
XXX is the point number, followed by an alpha
descriptor for the point. To end the test, enter any security code and press OFF.
An End of Walk-Test message will be sent to the central
If the auto-test option has been selected, the control
station (if programmed). Note that the test will
panel will attempt to automatically test all of the
automatically end if no faults are detected within a 60-
polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9
minute time period.
or 16. For points that must be manually tested, fault
and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn.
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)

This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in Open and close each protected door and window in turn.
response to faults on zones for the purpose of allowing Each action should produce 3 beeps from the keypad.
proper zone operation to be checked without triggering Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen for three
alarms. This test can be activated by any user by beeps when the detector senses movement. The keypad
entering the corresponding security code and pressing displays the zone number and alpha descriptor while a
TEST while the burglary portion of the system is door or window remains open or while a detector
disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a remains activated. The system automatically issues a
weekly basis. Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10
When this test is first entered, the system activates the seconds after it finds a fault on this zone, to allow
alarm output for 3 seconds. The system sends a Start of faulted detectors to be reset.
Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypad To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF.
displays “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and sounds a An End of Walk-Test message is sent to the central
single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains station.
active.
10-2
Section 10 – Testing The System
Armed Burglary System Test

• Alarm messages are sent to the central Step Action
station during the armed tests. Notify the
central station that a test will be in progress. 6 Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if
programmed, by pressing the panic key pairs
• A display of “COMM FAILURE” indicates a
(✳ and #, 1 and ✳, and/or 3 and #).
failure to communicate (no kissoff by the
receiver at the central station). If this occurs, The word ALARM and a descriptor “999” are
verify that the phone line is connected, the displayed for ✳ and #. If [1] and [✳] are
correct report format is programmed, etc. pressed, “995” is displayed; if [3] and [#] are
pressed, “996” is displayed.
To perform an armed burglary test, proceed as follows:
7 If the system has been programmed for
Step Action audible emergency, the keypad emits a loud,
1 Notify the central station that a test of the steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by
system is being performed. entering the security code and pressing OFF.
If the system has been programmed for silent
2 Arm the system.
panic, there are no audible alarms or
3 Fault one or more zones. displays. A report is sent to the central
4 Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by station, however.
entering the code and pressing OFF. 8 Notify the central station that all tests are
NOTE: The system must be rearmed after finished, and verify results with them.
each code + off sequence.
5 Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the
assigned delay times.
Testing Wireless Transmitters

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode Go/No Go Test Mode
Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that This mode assists in determining good mounting
transmitters have all been properly programmed. locations, and that the RF transmission has sufficient
signal amplitude margin for the installed system.
• All partitions with wireless transmitters must
If a transmitter does not have its serial number be placed in the test mode for RF receiver
“enrolled,” it will not turn off its zone number. sensitivity reduction (50%). Otherwise, the
RF receiver remains at full strength.
• Make sure that all partitions are disarmed
To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, proceed as for this test.
follows:
To enter the Go/No Go Test Mode, proceed as follows:
Step Action
Step Action
1 Enter Installer Code + [#] + [3]. The
keypad displays all zone numbers of wireless 1 Enter Installer Code + [5].
units programmed into the system. 2 Fault each wireless transmitter, causing each
2 Fault each wireless zone, causing each device device to transmit.
to transmit. The keypad will beep three times if the signal
As the system receives a signal from each of is received.
the transmitters, the zone number of that 3 If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move
transmitter disappears from the display. the transmitter to another location. Usually
3 Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the a few inches in either direction is all that is
Sniffer Mode. required.
4 Enter Installer Code + OFF to exit the
Go/No Go Test Mode.
10-3
Trouble Conditions
Supervisory Messages Other System Messages
Display Description Display Description
SUPV + This indicates that a fire supervisory COMM Indicates a failure occurred in the
Zone condition exists on the zone number FAILURE telephone communication portion of your
Number displayed. This means that the operation system.
of the fire alarm system may be LO BAT Indicates a low-battery condition exists in
compromised.
the wireless transmitter displayed.
Check or Trouble Messages Pressing any key silences the audible
warning sound.
Display Description
SYSTEM This indicates that a low-battery condition
CHECK or This indicates that a problem exists on LO BAT exists with the system’s backup battery.
TRBL the zone number displayed. Zone trouble
may be caused by one of the following HSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a high
(as per field
conditions: sensitivity level, which may cause a false
1✳07)
alarm. The detector should be cleaned or
• A hardwired fire zone is open replaced.
(broken wire).
LSENS Indicates a smoke detector with a low
• A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is
faulted. sensitivity level. The detector may not
detect a smoke condition. The detector
• A polling loop zone is not seen by should be cleaned or replaced.
the control panel.
RCVR Indicates the system has more wireless
• A polling loop zone has been
SETUP zones programmed than the RF receiver
tampered (cover removed on a
ERROR can support. If this is not corrected, none
4190).
of the zones in the system will be
• A wireless zone has not checked in protected. If additional wireless zones are
during the time programmed in field desired, use an appropriate receiver.
1✳31.
MODEM This indicates that the control is on-line
• A 5800 Series transmitter has been
COMM with a remote computer.
tampered (cover removed).
CHECK 6XX This indicates a trouble on a 4204CF System Off-Normal Report
XX = 01-32 Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit If programmed, an Off-Normal report is generated
(corresponding relay number 01-32). instead of the periodic test report if any of the following
CHECK 8XX This indicates a trouble on a peripheral conditions are present at the time of the report:
XX = 00-30 device (connected to the panel’s keypad • Fire trouble on any zone (zone types 9, 16, 17, 18)
terminals) of the corresponding device • Fire supervisory present (zone type 18)
address (00-30). • Unrestored fire alarm on any zone
CHECK 9XX This indicates that a system trouble • Bypass of any fire zone
XX = 00-99 exists (RF receiver, Notification • A fault for any supervised fire Notification
Appliance Circuit, etc.). Appliance Circuit
• Bypass/disable of any supervised fire Notification
If the problem has been corrected, enter an Appliance Circuit
OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice • Telco fault of either dialer line
to clear the display. • Bypass/disable of either dialer line
• Earth ground fault
Power Failure • Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone
• Fault on LORRA “XMIT OK” signal (if enabled)
Display Description
• LORRA trigger bypassed
AC LOSS This indicates that the system is • AC failure
POWER operating on battery power only. Check • Low system battery
LED is off to see that the circuit breaker for the
• Keypad supervision fault
branch circuit that your system’s
transformer is wired to has not been The Off-Normal report is sent as follows:
accidentally turned off. Instruct the • Contact ID: Code 608
user to call a service representative • High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used
immediately if AC power cannot be (channel 9=6)
restored. • Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group
#4 report codes
10-4
Section 10 – Testing The System
To the Installer
Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) Contacting Technical Support
by the installer and frequent testing by the user are
vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure
system. you:
The installer should assume the responsibility of • READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!
developing and offering a regular maintenance program • Check all wiring connections.
to the user as well as acquainting the user with the • Determine that the power supply and/or backup
proper operation and limitations of the alarm system battery are supplying proper voltages.
and its component parts. Recommendations must be • Verify your programming information where
included for a specific program of frequent testing (at applicable.
least weekly) to ensure the system’s proper operation at
• Verify that all keypads and devices are addressed
all times.
properly.
Turning the System over to the User • Note the proper model number of this product, and
Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by the version level (if known) along with any
going over each of its functions, as well as the User’s documentation that came with the product.
Manual supplied. • Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or
In particular, explain the operation of each zone company name.
(entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the Having this information handy will make it easier for
user understands how to operate any emergency us to serve you quickly and effectively.
feature(s) programmed into the system. You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax.
Please include your return fax number. You will receive
a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical
Support via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support’s
Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are posted
within 24 hours.
Technical Support: .....................................................1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. EST)

ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK Automated Fax Retrieval System:.....................1-800-573-0153 or
................................................................................................. 1-516-921-6704 / ext. 1667
World Wide Web Address: ................................................ HTTP:// WWW.ADEMCO.COM
10-5
10-6
A P P E N D I X A
Regulatory Agency Statements

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
UL Installation Requirements
The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary installations:
1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).
2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.
3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.
4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a
tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied with VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB) or by installing a UL
Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire the selected device to any
EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour
audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned
systems.
5. Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.
UL864/NFPA Local Fire
Configure at least one Notification Appliance Circuit for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators
to it. Program this circuit for temporal sounding.
UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire
1. Size the backup battery for 24-hour standby (central station) or 60-hour standby (remote station) time.
2. For central station service, you may use the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAs alone, the main dialer with a
LORRA, or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module. For remote station service, you
must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module.
3. When using the LORRA, connect its channel inputs to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB’s fire alarm, fire
supervisory (if used), and trouble triggers. Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input 1 on the
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB’s J2 header. Program J2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24-hour trouble
response (type 19) to send radio faults.
4. When the main dialer is used, enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a telephone line. Assign a 24-hour
trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA-
32FB/VISTA-128FB will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault.
5. When the backup dialer is used, install it on the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB’s PCB shield. Enable it
(field 3*30) and connect it to a separate telephone line. Assign a 24-hour trouble response (type 19) to
system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision.
6. When the dialer is used, program it to send fire alarm, fire supervisory (if used), trouble, AC loss, low
battery, normal dialer test, and off-normal dialer test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" maximum
so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.
7. If a secondary number is programmed, set the maximum number of dialer re-tries to 3, 4, or 5 in field
3*21.
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault
1. Use the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB.
2. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors may not be used. If
4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.
3. Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB cabinet backbox. For safe and
vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the backbox. (Also see
Mounting the Cabinet in SECTION 3: Installing the Control)
A-1
4. Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the Notification Appliance Circuit. Bell wires must be run
in conduit. Program the Notification Appliance Circuit for 16 minutes or longer timeout and for
confirmation of arming ding. (Also see SECTION 3: Installing the Control)
5. Wire the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any EOLR
supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible
alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.
6. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
• You may use the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.
• When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and Communicator Test
reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.
• If using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
For Grade AA Service:
• You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.
• Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
• You must use the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB’s dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.
• Connect the control’s burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J2 header) to the 7720. Program a 24-
hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB
will activate the burglary/audible panic trigger when a corresponding alarm is detected, and will activate
the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is detected.
• Also connect the 7720’s radio fault output to one of the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB’s EOLR-supervised
zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24-hour alarm (type
07, 08) response to radio faults.
• Program the control’s dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low Battery
reports.
For Grade AA Service:
Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements.
24-hour backup: The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations which require that all
residential fire alarm control panels installed after June 30, 1993 must be provided with a backup battery
which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the
intended standby condition, followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition. Be
sure to size the battery to meet this requirement.
A-2
Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) PART 15 STATEMENT

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the
RJ31X (CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on
installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will
result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been
disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If
upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company
that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or
out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an
authorized service agency for all repairs.
FCC PART 68 NOTICE
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for
this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following jacks:
An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty
information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request
that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the
manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the
reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
A-3
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
NOTICE AVIS
The Industry Canada Label identifies certified L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le
equipment. This certification means that the matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le
equipment meets telecommunications network matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,
protective, operational and safety requirements as d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). documents concernant les exigences techniques
The Department does not guarantee the relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera
Before installing this equipment, users should à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur. Avant d’installer
ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est
facilities of the local telecommunications permis de le raccorder aux installations de
company. The equipment must also be installed l’enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le
using an acceptable method of connection. The matériel doit également être installé en suivant
customer should be aware that compliance with une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L’abonné
the above conditions may not prevent degradation ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la
of service in some situations. conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus
Repairs to certified equipment should be n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans
coordinated by a representative designated by the certaines situations.
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent
user to this equipment, or equipment être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par
malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications le fournisseur. L’entreprise de
company to request the user to disconnect the télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur
equipment. da débrancher un appareil à la suite de
Users should ensure for their own protection that réparations ou de modifications effectuées par
the electrical ground connections of the power l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais
utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic fonctionnement.
water pipe system, if present, are connected Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit
together. This precaution may be particularly s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la
important in rural areas. source d’energie électrique, de lignes
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such téléphoniques et des canalisations d’eau
connections themselves, but should contact an métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
appropriate electric inspection authority, or Cette précaution est particulièrement importante
electrician, as appropriate. dans les régions rurales.
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter
(REN) assigned to each terminal device provides de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir
an indication of the maximum number of racours à un service d’inspection des installations
terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
interface. The termination on an interface may AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie
consist of any combination of devices subject only (IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d’une
exceed 5. interface téléphonique peut consister en une
combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule
condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de
la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
A-4
A P P E N D I X B
Summary of System Commands

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
User Code Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User’s Code
Commands Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User’s Code
Delete a User’s Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number to Be Deleted + Your Code
Again
View User Capability = User’s Code + [✳] + [✳]
Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] + 63
Programming Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.

Commands Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.
Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.
Enter Interactive Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000 + [#] + 93
Exit Program Mode = ✳99 or ✳98.
Event Logging Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)
Commands Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)
Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)
Wireless System House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)

Commands Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)
Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)
Additional Partition GOTO User Code + [✳] + Partition Number 0-8.

Commands GOTO Home Partition User Code + [✳] + 0.
Panics [✳] + 1 or A Key (Zone 995).
[✳] + [#] or B Key (Zone 999).
[#] + 3 or C Key (Zone 996).
View Downloaded Messages Press 0 for 5 Seconds.
Display All Zone Descriptors Press [✳] for 5 Seconds.
Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds.
Output Device Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.
Control Commands Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.
Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.
Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.
Test Mode Burglary Walk-Test = User Code + 5.
Commands Fire Drill Test = User Code + [#] + 69 (Installer or Master Only).
One-Man Fire Walk-Test = User Code + [#] + 68 (Installer Only)
Scheduling Pre-Programmed Schedule Events = User Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master Only).
Commands Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.
B-1
Access Control Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.
Commands Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.
Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point Number.
Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] + 75 + Access Point + State.
Perform a Test of the VistaKey Module = Installer Code + [#] + 78.
Perform an Access Control Card Function = User Code + [#] + 79.
B-2
A P P E N D I X C
Specifications
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB CONTROL
Physical: 18"H X 14-1/2"W X 4.3"D
Electrical:
Primary Power: From ADEMCO No. 1451 Transformer with enclosure; rated 18VAC, 72VA.
Backup Battery: 12VDC, 12AH min to 34.4AH max lead acid battery (gel type).
Alarm Power: 12VDC, 1.7 amps max for each Notification Appliance Circuit.
Aux. Standby Pwr 12VDC, 1 amp max.
Total Power Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2.3 amps.
Standby Time: 24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205ma aux. Standby load
using 34.4AH battery.
Fusing: Battery input, auxiliary and Notification Appliance Circuits are protected using PTC
circuit protectors. All outputs are power limited.
Main Dialer
Line Seize: Double Pole
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B
FCC Registration No.: AC3-USA-68192-AL-E
TLM Threshold Good line when tip-to-ring voltage greater than approximately 25V (13 when blue
jumper cut) or when handset current greater than approximately 10ma. Bad line
when both voltage and current below these levels.
Formats: ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO
Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed
Agency Listings:
Burglary: UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault.
UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station.
UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect.
Fire: UL864-NFPA 72 Local, Central Station, and Remote Station
5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE
Physical: 2.75”H X 4”W X 1”D
Mounts on VISTA-128FB main PC board shield using standoffs supplied.
Connects to VISTA-128FB main PC board J3 header using ribbon cable supplied.
FCC Registration: AC3-USA-62628-MO-N
C-1
Remote Keypads
6139(R) 6160CR
Physical: Physical:
Width: 6.25 inches Width: 7.437 inches
Height: 4.75 inches Height: 5.25 inches
Depth: 1.25 inches Depth: 1.312 inches
Electrical: Electrical:
Voltage Input: 12VDC Voltage Input: 12VDC
Current Drain: 100mA Current Drain: 150mA
Interface Wiring: Interface Wiring:
RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary
power power
BLUE: Not Used BLUE: Not Used
GREEN: Data to control panel GREEN: Data to control panel
YELLOW: Data from control panel YELLOW: Data from control panel
BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from
supplemental power supply supplemental power supply
C-2
A P P E N D I X D
Contact ID Event Codes

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES

Code Definition Code Definition
110 Fire Alarm 406 Cancel by User
111 Smoke Alarm 407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)
113 Waterflow Alarm 408 Quick Arm
121 Duress 409 Keyswitch O/C
122 Silent Panic 411 Callback Requested
123 Audible Panic 421 Access Denied
124 Duress Access Grant 422 Access Granted
125 Duress Egress Grant 423 Door Force Open
131 Perimeter Burglary 424 Egress Denied
132 Interior Burglary 425 Egress Granted
133 24-Hour Burglary 426 Door Prop Open
134 Entry/Exit Burglary 427 Access Point DSM Trouble
135 Day/Night Burglary 428 Access Point RTE Trouble
140 ACS Zone Alarm 429 ACS Program Entry
142 Polling Loop Short Alarm 430 ACS Program Exit
150 24-Hour Auxiliary 431 ACS Threat Change
200 Fire Supervisory 432 Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail
301 AC Loss 433 Access Point RTE Shunt
302 Low System Battery 434 Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt
305 System Reset 441 Armed STAY
306 Program Tamper 451 Early Open/Close
308 System Shutdown 452 Late Open/Close
309 Battery Test Fail 453 Fail to Open
310 Ground Fault 454 Fail to Close
313 System Engineer Reset 455 Auto-Arm Fail
320 ACS Relay Supervision 457 Exit Error by User
321 Bell 1 Trouble 459 Recent Close
322 Bell 2 Trouble 501 ACS Reader Disable
332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble 520 ACS Relay Disable
333 Expansion Module Failure 521 Bell 1 Bypass
338 ACS Module Low Battery 522 Bell 2 Bypass
339 ACS Module Reset 524 Auxiliary Relay Bypass
342 ACS Module AC Loss 551 Main/Backup Dialer Bypass
343 ACS Module Self-Test Fail 570 Bypass
344 RF Jam 576 ACS Zone Shunt
351 Main Dialer Trouble 577 ACS Point Bypass
352 Backup Dialer Trouble 602 Communicator Test
354 ACS RS232 Fail 604 Fire Test
373 Fire Loop Trouble 606 Listen-In to Follow
374 Exit Error by Zone 607 Burglary Walk-Test
380 Trouble (global) 608 Off-Normal
381 Loss of Supervision (RF) 611 Fire Walk-Test – Point Tested
382 Loss of RPM Supervision 612 Fire Walk-Test – Point Not Tested
383 RPM Sensor Tamper 621 Event Log Reset
384 RF Transmitter Low Battery 622 Event Log 50% Full
385 High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal 623 Event Log 90% Full
386 Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal 624 Event Log Overflow
389 Detector Self-Test Failed 625 Time/Date Reset
401 O/C by User 631 Exception Schedule Change
403 Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm 632 Access Schedule Change
D-1
D-2
Index
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
#93 Menu Mode Programming ...................................... 4-2 ADEMCO 4+2 Express.................................................. 3-7
#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands................... 4-4 ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS..............................................C-1
12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format .................................. 5-11 ADEMCO 4146............................................................ 3-18
1361 ............................................................................ 3-30 ADEMCO 685 receiver.................................................. 3-7
1451 Transformer ..........................................................C-1 ADEMCO 685 Receiver .............................................. 3-28
24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07 ..................................... 4-6 Ademco AB12. .............................................................. 3-1
24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 ................................... 4-6 ADEMCO Contact ID..................................................... 3-7
24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06........................................ 4-6 ADEMCO CONTACT ID................................................C-1
24-Hour Trouble ............................................................ 4-6 ADEMCO HIGH SPEED ...............................................C-1
2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors ........................ 3-11 ADEMCO Low Speed.................................................... 3-7
2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8 ADEMCO LOW SPEED ................................................C-1
333 PRM ....................................................................... 3-9 Affects Lobby.......................................................... 2-2, 5-7
4100APG LED Indications........................................... 3-22 Agency Listings .............................................................C-1
4100APG Pager Interface ........................................... 3-22 Agency Statements ....................................................... A-1
4100SM ......................................................................... 7-3 Alarm Activation ............................................................ 3-5
4100SM Serial Module .................................................. 7-3 Alarm Indicating Devices............................................... 3-4
4101SN Relay Modules............................................... 3-18 Alarm Output Supervision ............................................. 3-4
4197 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13 Alarm Power..................................................................C-1
4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules ............................... 3-17 Alarm Sounds Bell 1 & 2 ............................................. 5-13
4285/4286 VIP Module ................................................ 3-26 Allow Disarm Outside Window if Alarm Occurs ........... 5-12
4297 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 3-13 Allow Disarming Only During Arm/Disarm Windows ... 5-12
4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset....................................... 3-6 ALPHA PROG ............................................................... 4-3
4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 3-8 Antenna Fault .............................................................. 3-21
5140DLM Backup Dialer................................................ 3-7 Arm/Disarm Commands ................................................ 6-8
5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE .........................C-1 Arm-Away Type 21........................................................ 4-7
5800 Series Transmitters ................................... 3-16, 3-17 Armed Burglary System Test....................................... 10-3
5800TM Module........................................................... 3-15 Arms Lobby ............................................................ 2-2, 5-7
5869 ..................................................................... 1-2, 3-14 Arm-STAY Type 20 ....................................................... 4-6
5881ENHC ........................................................... 1-2, 3-14 ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK ................................................ 10-5
5881ENHC with Tamper Protection............................. 3-14 Audio Alarm Verification Module ................................. 3-28
6139 ..............................................................................C-2 Auto Arming................................................................... 6-1
6160 ..............................................................................C-2 Auto Disarming.............................................................. 6-1
7720 ............................................................................ 3-21 Auto-Arm Delay .................................................... 5-12, 6-1
7720ULF...................................................................... 3-21 Auto-Arm Warning......................................................... 6-1
7920SE........................................................................ 3-21 Auto-Arm Warning Period............................................ 5-12
Auto-Disarm Delay ...................................................... 5-12
AUTO-TEST DET?...................................................... 10-2
A Aux. Standby Pwr..........................................................C-1
Auxiliary Input Alternate Function Enable.................... 5-14
AAV ............................................................................. 3-28 Auxiliary Power 1 Current Load................................... 3-31
AC 60Hz or 50Hz......................................................... 5-10 Auxiliary Power 2 Current Load................................... 3-32
AC LOSS..................................................................... 10-4 Auxiliary Relay Connections.......................................... 3-5
AC Loss Keypad Sounding............................................ 5-2 Auxiliary Relay Function Selection .............................. 5-15
Access Group ............................................................... 9-3
Access Control .....................................1-2, 3-24, 3-25, 4-8
Access Control Commands ....................................6-8, B-2 B
Access Control Dialer Enables ...................................... 5-9
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point ............................ 4-9 Backup Battery ..............................................................C-1
Access Control of Lighting and Appliances ................... 4-9 Backup Dialer TouchTone or Rotary ........................... 5-14
Access Control Relay .................................................. 5-11 Battery Capacity Worksheet........................................ 3-33
Access Control Using RF Transmitter ........................... 4-9 Battery Saver................................................................. 3-6
ACCESS GRP PGM...................................................... 4-3 Battery Selection Table ............................................... 3-33
ACCESS POINT PGM................................................... 4-3 Battery Test ................................................................. 10-1
Access Point Type 27.................................................... 4-7 Bell 1 Output Current Load.......................................... 3-32
Access Schedules ......................................................... 6-5 Bell 1 Timeout ............................................................... 5-1
Action Code................................................................... 6-8 Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Timeout ................................. 5-15
Action Specifier.............................................................. 6-8 Bell 2 Output Current Load.......................................... 3-32
Activation Time .............................................................. 6-9 Burglary Alarm Communicator Delay ............................ 5-7
Adding a User Code ...................................................... 9-3 Burglary Features on Partition 1 Enable...................... 5-15
Adding an RF Key to a User Code ................................ 9-4 Burglary Trigger for Response Type 8 .......................... 5-2
Index-1
Burglary Walk Test ...................................................... 10-2 Display Fire Alarms of Other Partitions ....................... 5-13
Button RF .................................................................... 3-16 Display Troubles of Other Partitions............................ 5-13
Button RF (BR) Type 05 ................................................ 4-7 Door Status Monitor (DSM) Type 11 ............................. 4-7
Bypass Commands ....................................................... 6-8 Download Command Enables....................................... 5-3
Download ID Number .................................................... 5-3
Download Phone Number ............................................. 5-3
C Downloading.................................................................. 7-1
Downloading Access Security ....................................... 7-1
C.S. TRANSMIT? ........................................................ 10-2 Downloading Requirements .......................................... 7-1
Cabinet Lock ................................................................. 3-1 Dual Reporting .............................................................. 5-5
California State Fire Marshal .........................................A-2 Duress Codes Level 6 ................................................... 9-2
Call Waiting Defeat...................................................... 5-10 Duress Reporting .......................................................... 9-2
Callback......................................................................... 7-2 Dynamic Signaling Delay ..................................... 3-20, 5-5
Callback Requested ...................................................... 7-1 Dynamic Signaling Priority.................................... 3-20, 5-5
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS ......................A-4
Card Reader................................................................ 3-24
Changing a User Code .................................................. 9-4 E
Check Messages ......................................................... 10-4
Check or TRBL Display ............................................... 5-13 Early Power Detect...................................................... 3-21
Checksum Verification................................................... 5-5 Earth Ground............................................................... 3-30
Chime on Bell 1 ........................................................... 5-10 Enable 5800 RF Button Force Arm ............................. 5-11
Code + TEST [5]................................................. 10-1, 10-2 Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm ............................ 5-10
COMM FAILURE ......................................................... 10-4 Enable Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay Chime Annunciation .. 5-15
Common Lobby ............................................................. 2-1 Enable Dialer Reports for Panics & Duress................... 5-7
Communication Defaults ............................................... 4-5 Enable GOTO for this Partition.................................... 5-12
Communicator Split Reporting....................................... 5-9 Enable J2 Triggers for Partition ................................... 5-12
Compass Downloading Software................................... 7-3 Enable Open/Close Report for Installer Code ............... 5-4
COMPASS downloading software ................................. 7-1 Enable Open/Close report for Keyswitch....................... 5-4
Confirmation of Arming Ding ......................................... 5-2 Entering Programming Mode......................................... 4-1
Confirmation of Arming Ding Bell 2 & Auxiliary Relay.. 5-15 Entry Delay #1............................................................... 5-1
Console Input (CS) Type 09 .......................................... 4-7 Entry Delay #2............................................................... 5-1
Contact ID ..................................................................... 1-3 Entry Warning................................................................ 5-7
CONTACT ID EVENT CODES ......................................D-1 Entry/Exit #1 Type 01 .................................................... 4-5
Contacting Technical Support ..................................... 10-5 Entry/Exit #2 Type 02 .................................................... 4-6
Control Panel as Stand-Alone Access Control .............. 4-9 Event Log .................................................................... 3-26
Conventions Used in This Manual ................................... vii Event Log Printer On-Line Mode ................................. 5-11
Cross Zoning Pair Four ................................................. 5-8 Event Log Programming.............................................. 4-10
Cross Zoning Pair One .................................................. 5-8 Event Log Types ......................................................... 5-11
Cross Zoning Pair Three ............................................... 5-8 Event Logging Commands ............................................ B-1
Cross Zoning Pair Two .................................................. 5-8 EVENT/ACTION PGM................................................... 4-3
Cross-Zoning................................................................. 5-8 Exception Reports ......................................................... 6-2
Current Load Total....................................................... 3-32 Exit Delay #1 ................................................................. 5-1
CUSTOM INDEX ........................................................... 4-3 Exit Delay #2 ................................................................. 5-1
Exit Delay Reset............................................................ 5-8
Exit Delay Sounding .................................................... 5-10
D Exit Error ....................................................................... 1-2
Exit Error Logic Enable.................................................. 5-7
Data Encryption............................................................. 7-1 Exiting the User Edit Mode............................................ 9-4
Data Field Descriptions ................................................. 5-1 EXPERT MODE ............................................................ 4-3
Data Field Programming Mode...................................... 4-1 Extend Closing Window ................................................ 6-1
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Month........................ 5-11 Extended Delay for Zone Types 17 & 18..................... 5-14
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Weekend................... 5-11 External Sounders......................................................... 3-4
Deleting a User Code .................................................... 9-4
DEVICE PROG.............................................................. 4-3
Dial Tone Detection ....................................................... 5-4 F
Dial Tone Pause ............................................................ 5-4
Dialer Selection ........................................................... 5-14 FCC Part 15 STATEMENT............................................ A-3
Dialer Test ................................................................... 10-1 FCC PART 68 NOTICE................................................. A-3
DIP Switch Loop (DP) Type 07...................................... 4-7 FCC REGISTRATION NO.............................................C-1
Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS) Type 08 ........ 4-7 Fire (Without Verification) Type 09 ................................ 4-6
Direct-Wire Downloading............................................... 7-3 Fire Display Lock......................................................... 5-13
Disable Download Callback......................................... 5-10 Fire Drill Test ............................................................... 10-1
Disarm Delay ................................................................. 6-1 Fire Supervisory ............................................................ 4-6
Disarm Type 22 ............................................................. 4-7 Fire Walk-Test Mode ..................................................... 1-3
Display Burglary & Panic Alarms for Other Partitions .. 5-13 Fire Waterflow ............................................................... 4-6
Index-2
Fire With Verification Type 16 ....................................... 4-6 Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming............ 6-11
First Communication...................................................... 7-2 LINE SEIZE ...................................................................C-1
First Test Report Time................................................... 5-6 List of Figures................................................................... vi
Force Arm...................................................................... 6-1 LO BAT ....................................................................... 10-4
Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm .................................. 5-12 Lobby Partition .............................................................. 5-7
Frwd. Power Loss........................................................ 3-21 Log First Maintenance Signal ...................................... 5-11
FSA Modules............................................................... 3-18 LOG RESULTS? ......................................................... 10-2
Fusing............................................................................C-1 Long Range Radio Central Station #1 Category
Enable ....................................................................... 5-5
Long Range Radio Central Station #2 Category
G Enable ....................................................................... 5-5
Long Range Radio ECP Programming........................ 4-10
General Description....................................................... 1-1 Long Range Radio to ECP .......................................... 3-20
General Purpose (GP) Type 13 ..................................... 4-7 Long Range Radio to J2 Triggers................................ 3-21
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel ............................ 7-2 Low Speed Format (Primary) ........................................ 5-4
Global Arm ? ................................................................. 9-3 Low Speed Format (Secondary).................................... 5-4
Global Arming................................................................ 2-3 LRR Battery................................................................. 3-21
Go/No Go Test Mode .................................................. 10-3 LRR CRC is bad.......................................................... 3-21
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing ............................ 3-1 LRR reporting options ................................................. 3-20
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing.................... 3-2 LRR Trouble Messages............................................... 3-21
Grade A Service ............................................................A-2 LSENS ........................................................................ 10-4
Grade AA Service..........................................................A-2
M
H
Main Logic Board ........................................................ 3-25
Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones ...................... 1-1 Main Logic Board Supervision Type 28......................... 4-7
Hardwired (HW) Type 01............................................... 4-7 Manager Codes Level 2 ................................................ 9-1
Holiday Schedule........................................................... 6-3 Master Codes Level 1 ................................................... 9-1
Holiday Schedule Programming .................................... 6-7 Master Keypad .............................................................. 2-3
Holiday schedules ......................................................... 6-5 Maximum Number of Dialer Attempts.......................... 5-14
Holiday Schedules......................................................... 6-6 MODEM COMM ................................................... 7-1, 10-4
House ID Sniffer Mode ................................................ 3-16 modems ........................................................................ 7-1
HSENS ........................................................................ 10-4 Momentary Exit Type 29 ............................................... 4-7
Mounting The Control Cabinet....................................... 3-1
Multi-Access ? ............................................................... 9-3
I Multiple Alarms.............................................................. 5-2
Multiple Partition Access ............................................... 9-2
Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper .................................... 5-2
Installer (User 1) Code Level 0...................................... 9-1
Installer Code ................................................................ 5-1 N
Installing RPM Devices................................................ 3-11
Installing The Control..................................................... 3-1 No Alarm Response Type 23 ........................................ 4-7
Installing the Control’s Circuit Board.............................. 3-2 Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 3-8).......................... 5-4
Intelligent Test Report ................................................... 5-2 Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision ..................... 3-4
Interior w/Delay Type 10................................................ 4-6 Number of Partitions.................................................... 5-11
Interior, Follower Type 04.............................................. 4-6
O
K
OC or OPEN CIRCUIT .................................................. 3-3
Keypad Like Sounder .................................................. 3-20 Off-Normal Report ....................................................... 10-4
Keypad Panic Enables .................................................. 5-2 On-Line Control Functions............................................. 7-2
Keypad Wiring ............................................................... 3-3 Open/Close Reporting................................................... 9-2
Keypads ........................................................................ 2-1 Open/Close Reports by Exception ....................... 5-12, 6-3
Keypads Addressing...................................................... 3-3 Open/Close Schedule ................................................... 6-3
Keyswitch .................................................................... 3-18 Open/Close Schedule Programming ............................. 6-6
Keyswitch Assignment................................................... 5-2 Open/Close Schedules........................................... 6-4, 6-6
Keyswitch LED Indications .......................................... 3-18 Open/Close Windows.................................................... 6-8
Keyswitch Tamper ....................................................... 3-19 Operator Access Levels ................................................ 7-1
Operator Codes Levels 3-5 ........................................... 9-1
Output Device Control Commands................................ B-1
L Output Devices............................................................ 3-17
OUTPUT PGM .............................................................. 4-3
Limitation of Access....................................................... 6-2 overvoltage protection ................................................... 3-7
Limitation of Access Schedules ................................... 6-11
Index-3
Relay Timeout YYY Seconds ...................................... 5-11
P REPORT CODE PROG ................................................ 4-3
Reporting Formats......................................................... 3-7
PABX Access Code....................................................... 5-3 Request to Exit (RTE) Type 12...................................... 4-7
Pager ID Number for Alarms ......................................... 5-5 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 1.................................. 5-14
Pager ID Number for Bypasses ..................................... 5-6 Reset on Second OFF for Bell 2.................................. 5-14
Pager ID Number for Open/Closes................................ 5-6 Restore Report Timing .................................................. 5-7
Pager ID Number for Supervision.................................. 5-6 Restrict Disarming ......................................................... 6-1
Pager ID Number for System ........................................ 5-6 RF Receiver Supervision Check-in Interval................... 5-9
Pager ID Number for Test ............................................. 5-6 RF System Advisories ................................................. 3-14
Pager Installed............................................................... 5-5 RF System Operation and Supervision ....................... 3-14
Pager Phone Number for Alarms................................... 5-5 RF Transmitter Check-in Interval................................... 5-9
Pager Phone Number for Bypasses .............................. 5-6 RF Transmitter Low Battery Reporting .......................... 5-9
Pager Phone Number for Opens/Closes ....................... 5-6 RF Transmitter Low Battery Sound ............................... 5-9
Pager Phone Number for Supervision ........................... 5-6 Ring Count .................................................................... 7-2
Pager Phone Number for System.................................. 5-6 Ring Detection Count .................................................... 5-4
Pager Phone Number for Test....................................... 5-6 RINGER EQUIVALENCE ..............................................C-1
Panic Button or Speedkey ............................................. 5-9 RJ31X ........................................................................... 3-7
Partitioned System ........................................................ 2-1 RJ31X jack .................................................................. 3-27
Partitioning ............................................................. 1-2, 2-1 RLY VOICE DESCR...................................................... 4-3
Partition-Specific Data Fields ........................................ 4-2 RTE ............................................................................... 4-7
PassPoint Access Control (ACS) Type 10..................... 4-7
PassPoint Access Control System .............................. 3-25
PassPoint Dialer Events ................................................ 4-8 S
Perimeter Type 03 ......................................................... 4-6
Peripherals Devices....................................................... 1-2 Scheduling..................................................................... 6-1
Permanent Keypad Display Backlighting..................... 5-10 Scheduling Commands ................................................. B-1
Phone Module Access Code ......................................... 5-2 Scheduling Menu Mode................................................. 6-4
PLL out of Lock............................................................ 3-21 Scheduling Programming Menu Structure..................... 6-4
polling loop .................................................................. 3-11 Scheduling Programming Options................................. 6-4
Polling Loop Current Draw .......................................... 3-31 Secondary Format......................................................... 5-4
Polling Loop Devices ................................................... 3-12 Secondary Phone Number ............................................ 5-3
Polling Loop Supervision ............................................. 3-13 Secondary Subscriber Account Number ....................... 5-7
Power Failure .............................................................. 10-4 Send Cancel If Alarm + Off.......................................... 5-10
Power Supply Load ..................................................... 3-31 serial number devices ................................................. 3-12
Power Unattained ........................................................ 3-21 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) Type 06 ..................... 4-7
Power-Up in Previous State .......................................... 5-3 serial printer................................................................. 3-23
Prevent Zone XXX Bypass ............................................ 5-4 SESCOA .......................................................................C-1
Primary Format.............................................................. 5-4 Sescoa/Radionics.......................................................... 3-7
Primary Phone Number ................................................. 5-3 Sescoa/Radionics Select............................................... 5-5
Primary Subscriber’s Account Number.......................... 5-3 Setting the Date............................................................. 8-1
Printer Baud Rate ........................................................ 5-11 Setting the Time ............................................................ 8-1
Printer Configurations.................................................. 3-26 Smoke Power Reversal Module .................................... 3-9
Program Modes ............................................................. 4-1 Specifications ................................................................C-1
Programming Commands..............................................B-1 Standard/Expanded Reporting Primary......................... 5-5
PROGRAMMING COMMANDS .................................... 4-1 Standard/Expanded Reporting Secondary .................... 5-5
Programming Entry Errors............................................. 4-2 Standby Battery Size................................................... 3-33
Programming for 4100APG ........................................... 4-8 Supervised RF............................................................. 3-16
Programming Overview ................................................. 4-1 Supervised RF (RF) Type 03......................................... 4-7
PS24................................................................... 3-31, 3-33 Supervision Pulses for LRR......................................... 5-13
Supervisory Messages ................................................ 10-4
Supervisory on Open and Short .................................. 5-13
Q Supplementary Power Supply ....................................... 3-3
Suppress Transmitter Supervision Sound ................... 5-10
Quick Arm............................................................... 5-3, 9-1 Swinger Suppression .................................................... 5-6
System Commands ....................................................... B-1
R System Communication ................................................ 1-2
SYSTEM LO BAT........................................................ 10-4
System LoBat”............................................................. 10-1
Randomize AC Loss Report .......................................... 5-2
System Messages ....................................................... 10-4
RCVR SETUP ERROR ............................................... 10-4
System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module .............. 3-9
Real-Time Clock ............................................................ 8-1
System Zone Bypass Inhibit........................................ 5-15
Recent Close................................................................. 1-2
System-Wide Data Fields.............................................. 4-2
Regulatory Agency Statements .....................................A-1
Relay commands........................................................... 6-8
Relay Timeout XXX Minutes........................................ 5-11
Index-4
User Code Rules ........................................................... 9-2
T User Scheduling Menu Mode ...................................... 6-13
Users............................................................................. 2-1
Telco Handoff ................................................................ 7-3 Using ACS Zone Inputs................................................. 4-8
Telephone Line Connections......................................... 3-7
Telephone Line Supervision .......................................... 3-7
TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS .................A-3 V
Temporal Siren Pulse .................................................... 5-1
Temporary Schedule ..................................................... 6-3 View Capabilities ........................................................... 9-1
Temporary Schedules ................................................. 6-12 VIP Module.................................................................. 3-26
Temporary Schedules Programming ........................... 6-13 VIP Module Phone Code............................................... 5-2
Test Mode Commands ..................................................B-1 VISTA Gateway Module ....................................... 3-25, 4-8
Test Report Interval ....................................................... 5-2 VistaKey ............................................................... 3-24, 4-8
Testing The System..................................................... 10-1 VistaKey Dialer Enables................................................ 4-8
Time Driven Events ....................................................... 6-2
Time Driven Events Worksheet ..................................... 6-7
Time Window Definitions ............................................... 6-2 W
Time Windows ........................................................ 6-4, 6-5
Time Windows Programming ........................................ 6-5 Waterflow Alarm Silence Option.................................. 5-13
Timed Events ................................................................ 6-5 Wire Run Length/Gauge................................................ 3-3
Time-Driven Event Programming .................................. 6-9 Wireless Keypad Assignment...................................... 5-10
Time-Driven Events ....................................................... 6-7 Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect................................. 5-10
TouchTone or Rotary Dial ............................................. 5-3 Wireless System Commands ........................................ B-1
TouchTone with Rotary Backup .................................... 5-9 Wireless Zone Expansion............................................ 3-14
Transformer Connections ............................................ 3-30 Wiring Devices to Zones 1-9 ......................................... 3-8
Transmitter Battery Life ............................................... 3-16 Wiring the 4100APG.................................................... 3-22
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode ........................................ 10-3 Wiring the 4100APG With the Event Log Printer ......... 3-23
Transmitter Input Types............................................... 3-16 Wiring the Alarm Output ................................................ 3-4
Transmitter Supervision............................................... 3-16 Worksheets to calculate the total current .................... 3-31
Trigger Outputs Function Selection ............................. 5-14 World Wide Web Address ........................................... 10-5
Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05........................ 4-6
Trouble Conditions ...................................................... 10-4
Trouble Messages ....................................................... 10-4 Y
Trouble/Supervisory Activation...................................... 3-6
Turning the System Over to the User .......................... 10-5 Yuasa .......................................................................... 3-33
U Z
UL Installation Requirements ........................................A-1 Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification .................................. 5-11

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm............A-2 Zone 6 Alternate Function Enable ............................... 5-13
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Zone 6 Tamper Configuration...................................... 3-10
Mercantile Safe & Vault .............................................A-1 Zone 804 ..................................................................... 3-26
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm .............A-2 Zone Defaults ................................................................ 4-4
UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire .A-1 Zone Index .................................................................... 4-4
UL864/NFPA Local Fire.................................................A-1 Zone Input Type Definitions........................................... 4-7
UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION ........................ 2-2 Zone Number Designations........................................... 4-4
Unsupervised RF......................................................... 3-16 ZONE PROG............................................................ vii, 4-3
Unsupervised RF (UR) Type 04 .................................... 4-7 Zone Response Type Definitions .................................. 4-5
USE BELL DING? ....................................................... 10-1 Zone Type 18 Delay Use............................................. 5-13
Use Partition Descriptor............................................... 5-12 Zone Type Restore Enables for Types 16-18.............. 5-14
User Access Codes ....................................................... 9-1 Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 1-8....................... 5-6
User Code Authority Levels........................................... 9-1 Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 9 & 10.................. 5-6
User Code Commands ..................................................B-1 Zone Types 17 & 18 Delay.......................................... 5-13
Zones ............................................................................ 2-1
Index-5
WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or
other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari-
ety of reasons. For example:
• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or
disconnect an alarm warning device.
• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work with-
out power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in
properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.
• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if
the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not acti-
vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the
Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may
not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not
sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor de-
tector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No
smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by
carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable
materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire
and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning
to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their
installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams
of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion
or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.
Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical
system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the
ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection
performance can decrease.
• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the
other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-
rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear
the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.
Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect them-
selves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to
last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This
alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad
(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device
being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all
reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,
thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute
for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and
continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm
systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Honeywell International Inc., 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its product(s) to be in
conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship
under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product(s) or, for product(s)
not having a date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or
catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller’s obligation shall be
limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product(s) which is
proved not in compliance with Seller’s specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under
normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the
product(s) is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than Honeywell factory service. For
warranty service, return product(s) transportation prepaid, to Honeywell Factory Service, 165 Eileen Way,
Syosset, New York 11791.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE
FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR
DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER’S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.
Seller does not represent that the product(s) it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the
product(s) will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that
the product(s) will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a
properly installed and maintained alarm system may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire, or
other events occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not
occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER
SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS
BASED ON A CLAIM THAT THE PRODUCT(S) FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS
HELD LIABLE, WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING
UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN,
SELLER’S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF
THE PRODUCT(S), WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST
SELLER.
This warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product(s).
No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY
TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALING SERVICE:
THIS EQUIPMENT Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).
SHOULD BE INSTALLED WARNING: UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.
THE NATIONAL FIRE INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION
PROTECTION ASSOCI- FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS
NOTE: As shipped, Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using
ATION'S STANDARD 72 OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM 4 standoffs (supplied) See instructions for trigger use and programming
Vista-32FB is suitable (NATIONAL FIRE THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE (default functions shown)
The 5140DLM Dialer 1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)
PROTECTION ASSOC., TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS BACK-UP LINE SEIZE Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
for UL Commercial Fire LED (GREEN) FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N 2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)
BATTERYMARCH PARK, SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B 3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)
Installations. Cabinet QUINCY, MA. 02269). 4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)
60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING BACK-UP PHONE JACK 5. OUT 2 (FIRE)
supports up to 14AH PRINTED INFORMATION DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO SEE TELCO 6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)
JACK SHOCK 7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)
Batteries. Use Vista-ULKT DESCRIBING PROPER THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY WARNING RJ31X 8. GROUND
Cabinet Kit to house INSTALLATION, THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING BELOW 9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)
OPERATION, TESTING, JURISDICTION. Connect to main PCB RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:
up to 34.4AH Batteries. header J3 using ribbon (connect using supplied cable) LOW: 2K TO GROUND
MAINTENANCE AND CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR cable (supplied) Supervision is programmable HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX
Also use this kit along REPAIR SERVICE IS DELAY-SEC MODEL DELAY-SEC OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND
(ZONE) BACK-UP DIALER ON HOOK HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K
with 1451 Transformer TO BE PROVIDED WITH VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE) BACK-UP DIALER EARTH
for UL Listed Commercial THIS EQUIPMENT. GROUND SCREW
INTACT: 25V (wire to main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VOLTAGE
CUT: 13V terminal #30) TRIGGERS J2
Burglary Installations.
(not supervised)
OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE Make connections using
4142TR cable (not supplied)
MAIN PCB SHIELD MAIN DIALER ON HOOK
BATTERY TABS VOLTAGE THRESHOLD
THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED INTACT:25V
BLK + RED DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED J4 KEYPAD PORT #2 CUT: 13V
CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM
See instr. regarding port #2 use SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-
1. GROUND (to keypad black wire) W6
BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS KEYPAD PORT #2 QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION (BLUE)
INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire) SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH
Connect to 12V, 7AH min/34.4AH max J4 INTERFACE TO 5140DLM
lead acid batteries using cables supplied. CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used) 5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire) THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
Assembled In See instructions for required capacity. BELL 1 BELL 2 Rating: 10 - 14 VDC, AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. J3
Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery Make connections using 400mA max. See note 1 THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL
Mexico normally need not be replaced for 4142TR cable (supplied) 7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire) SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
at least 3 yrs. W1 W4 (not supervised) PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED
(WHITE) (WHITE) POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER. MAIN Connect
RJ31X using
TRNSFMR BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY KEYPAD PORT #1 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
OPTIONAL REMOVABLE RJ31X cable supplied.
TERMINAL BLOCK KIT: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Supervision is
ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK
programmable
ZONE 4 PHONE JACK
2A Circuit
Breaker
TRANSFORMER
W/ENCLOSURE AC WIRING IS
.
.
#1 X
LE
BELL 1 BELL 2
(lower left corner of cabinet) SUPERVISED
P
N.O
N.C
Data in
PO
Data out
OP
+ + +
WR AU
R
P
OO
REPLACE COVER AFTER OUTPUT: 18VAC, 72VA
S
OOP
Red Blk Grn Yel
PO ARE
Not Power Limited BELL BELL REMOTE KEYPADS:
LOOP EAK
CH LO
OR LKE
LOOP
Maintain 1/4" spacing

OR LKE
6139, 6139R POLLING

INPUT: to other wire AUX RELAY (FORM C) 6160,6160R LOOP
ECT
ECT
BLACK BL programmable response (See Note 3)

CTOR
120VAC, 60HZ,
MPER
Y SWIT
WHITE BL
2-W
HORN
2-W
HORN
DET IRE SMO
(not supervised)
DET IRE SMO
1.0A max. +
2-WIR
Contact Rating:
DETE E GLASS B
Connect to a + + + + +
PROG
PROG
AS TA RAMMABLE
AS KE RAMMABLE
NOTE: Use wires that 28V, 2.8A AUXILIARY POWER #1 + +

dedicated circuit. Connect to
have insulation rated resistive loads Rating: 10 - 14VDC SMOKE SMOKE + + GLASS 4209U
Connect to for 90% higher Earth Ground 2k (Note 2) 2k BREAK
1.0A MAX (STANDBY) EARTH GROUND
Proper Earth GRN GRN Terminal 30 ALARM POLARITY SHOWN
1.7A MAX (ALARM)
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
See instructions for
Ground. See See Note 1. N.C. N.C.
VISTA-32FB Summary of Connections Diagram

5192SD
proper earth ground
instructions. NOTES Each output may be selected for (not supervised) SMOKE connections
Style Y supervision or no supervision
NOTE 1: N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.
(See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and
The combined standby current
program field 3*10) 4208U
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2 2k (Note 2) 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k
and polling loop cannot exceed FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.
1.0A.The combined alarm current Use polarized sounding devices. ZONE 1-8 NOTES Ratings for zones 1,2:
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd. All zones provide Style B supervision TO OTHER DEVICES
- 10 - 14VDC
pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and EOLRs not req'd. May use non Zone resistance (excluding EOLR): Polling Loop Ratings: (supervised)
- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors
bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A. polarized devices. - Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max 128mA max. See Note 1.
of the type specified in the instructions
NOTE 2: Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max. - Other zones: 300 ohms max See instructions for compatible devices
can be used)
2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7 See note 1, see instructions Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones) and for max wire run length
UL compatibility ID: A
NOTE 3: for compatible devices. Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.
See instructions on setting For commercial fire, bell timeout WARNING: TO PREVENT N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.
addresses & for max # of keypads must be a minimum of 6 minutes.
and wire run length restrictions. RISK OF ELECTRICAL The VISTA-32FB Main Dialer
ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT
Keypad color subject to approval THE OUTPUT OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER SHOCK, DISCONNECT Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
of local authority. FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E
TELCO JACK BEFORE
SERVICING THIS PANEL
V32FB-SOC-V2
VISTA-32FB SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY
TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALING SERVICE:
WARNING: Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).
THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.
This equipment should be INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.
installed in accordance FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY
with the National Fire Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS
OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM 4 standoffs (supplied) See instructions for trigger use and programming
Protection Association's THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE The 5140DLM Dialer (default functions shown)
Standard 72 (National BACK-UP LINE SEIZE Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)
TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS LED (GREEN) 2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)
Fire Protection Assoc., FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N 3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)
SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B
Batterymarch Park, 4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)
60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING 5. OUT 2 (FIRE)
Quincy, MA. 02269). Printed BACK-UP PHONE JACK
DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO SEE TELCO 6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)
information describing proper THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY JACK SHOCK 7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)
installation, operation, RJ31X 8. GROUND
THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING WARNING 9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)
testing, maintenance and Connect to main PCB BELOW RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:
JURISDICTION. header J3 using ribbon
repair service is to be (connect using supplied cable) LOW: 2K TO GROUND
CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR cable (supplied) Supervision is programmable HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX
provided with this equipment. OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND
(ZONE) DELAY-SEC MODEL DELAY-SEC BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K
VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE) BACK-UP DIALER EARTH
INTACT: 25V GROUND SCREW
(wire to main PCB VOLTAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CUT: 13V terminal #30) TRIGGERS J2
(not supervised)
OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE Make connections using
4142TR cable (not supplied)
MAIN PCB SHIELD MAIN TLM ON HOOK
BATTERY TABS VOLTAGE THRESHOLD
THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED INTACT:25V
BLK + RED DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED CUT: 13V
J4 KEYPAD PORT #2 CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM
See instr. regarding port #2 use SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-
1. GROUND (to keypad black wire) W6
BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS KEYPAD PORT #2 QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION (BLUE)
4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire) SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH
Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J4 5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire) THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL INTERFACE TO 5140DLM
lead acid batteries using cables supplied. CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used) Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,
BELL 1 BELL 2 AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
See instructions for required capacity. 400mA max. See note 1 THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL J3
Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery Make connections using 7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire) SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
normally need not be replaced for 4142TR cable (supplied) POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.
W1 W4 (not supervised) PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED
at least 3 yrs. (WHITE) (WHITE) MAIN
Connect
RJ31X using
TRNSFMR BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY KEYPAD PORT #1 ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8
OPTIONAL REMOVABLE RJ31X cable supplied.
TERMINAL BLOCK KIT: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Supervision is
ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK programmable
ZONE 4 PHONE JACK
AC WIRING IS
.
.
WARNING:
LE
SUPERVISED BELL 1 BELL 2
P
N.O
N.C
TO PREVENT
Data in
PO
Data out
#1 X
+ + +
O
OUTPUT
R
OOP
OOP
Red Blk Grn Yel RISK OF

E
BL BL
E
WR AU
P
BELL BELL REMOTE KEYPADS: ELECTRICAL
S
LOOP EAK
PO ARE
OR LKE
OR LKE
6139, 6139R
CH LO
LOOP
TRANSFORMER POLLING SHOCK,

W/ENCLOSURE AUX RELAY (FORM C) 6160, 6160R LOOP DISCONNECT
ECT
ECT
ADEMCO No.1451 WH BLACK programmable response SEE NOTE 3

CTOR
(not supervised) TELCO JACK

MPER
(supplied) +
2-W
2-W
Y SWIT
HORN HORN
DET IRE SMO
DET IRE SMO
G
INPUT: 120VAC, INPUT Contact Rating: BEFORE

O
60HZ, 28V, 2.8A

2-WIR
R
DETE E GLASS B
AUXILIARY POWER #1 + + + + + SERVICING

P
resistive loads
AS TA RAMMABL
1.0A max. Connect to a

PROG
+
AS KE RAMMABL
Rating: 10 - 14VDC
VISTA-128FB Summary of Connections Diagram

dedicated circuit.
+ THIS PANEL
1.0A MAX (STANDBY) SMOKE SMOKE + + GLASS
OUTPUT: 18VAC 2k (note 2) 2k 1.7A MAX (ALARM) 4209U
72VA BREAK
See note 1. EARTH GROUND
ALARM POLARITY SHOWN (not supervised) See instructions for
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. proper earth ground
NOTES Each output may be selected for 5192SD connections
Style Y supervision or no supervision SMOKE
NOTE 1: (See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and
The combined standby current program field 3*10) N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2
and polling loop cannot exceed FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.
1.0A.The combined alarm current Use polarized sounding devices. 4208U
2k (note 2) 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k
drawn from aux pwr #1, aux BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd.
pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and EOLRs not req'd. May use non ZONE 1-8 NOTES
bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A. polarized devices. • All zones provide Style B supervision • Ratings for zones 1,2:
NOTE 2: Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max. • Zone resistance (excluding EOLR): - 10 - 14VDC TO OTHER DEVICES
2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7 See note 1, see instructions - Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max - 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors
- Other zones: 300 ohms max of the type specified in the instructions Polling Loop
NOTE 3: for compatible devices. Ratings:
See instructions on setting • Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones) can be used)
For commercial fire, bell timeout • UL compatibility ID: A (supervised)
addresses & for max # of keypads must be a minimum of 6 minutes. 128mA max. See note 1.
and wire run length restrictions. Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.
The VISTA-128 Main Dialer N.C. contacts for burg. usage only. See instructions for
Keypad color subject to approval ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT compatible devices
of local authority. THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 and for max wire
FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E run length
V128FB-SOC-V1
165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791
Copyright © 2004 Honeywell International, Inc.
www.honeywell.com/security
¬.9)l
K3521V3 6/04 Rev A

V128FB Install

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V128FB Install

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V128FB Install

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

K3521V3 6/04 Rev A

List of Figures ..................................................................................................................................... vi

APPENDIX A: Regulatory Agency Statements............................................................................... A-1

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:

About the VISTA-32FB/VISTA-128FB

Feature VISTA-32FB VISTA-128FB

Setting-Up a Partitioned System

Common Lobby Logic

1*18 1*19 Disarms when Attempts to arm Can be armed if

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

MAIN ENTRANCE V128BP-001-V0

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Possible status indications include:

Installing The Control

Mounting the Control Cabinet

Installing the Cabinet Lock

1 Remove the cabinet door, and the lock LOCKED

bracket when the door is closed.

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines

(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)

CABINET DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PLUG THIS RUN ALL REMAINING

Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines

Installing the Control’s Circuit Board

clips and secure the board to the cabinet with DETAIL C

Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board

Installing the Keypads

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

BLACK MAKE NO CONNECTION

Installing External Sounders

Notification Appliance Circuit Supervision

BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS

(e.g., BELL 1; TB4)

AB12 OUTER BOX

Figure 3-6: External Sounder Connections

Auxiliary Relay Connections

AUX RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS

Telephone Line Connections

• To prevent risk of shock, disconnect the

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2400 16

Figure 3-11: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control

Figure 3-12: Wiring a 333PRM using a Power Supply

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for

Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8

Installing RPM Devices

4293SN Serialized 1-Zone Expander 4278

4190SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander

INPUT POLLING LOOP EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT

• DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN

CONTROL PANEL INPUT POLLING LOOP

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2

COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:

Wireless Zone Expansion

118 119 Disarms when Attempts to arm Can be armed if